Jee Main Physics Super Thirty

CHAPTERWISE SUPER THIRTY
SIDE BY SIDE
PROBLEM-SOLUTION
PHYSICS PROBLEMS FOR
JEE MAIN
ASHOKA PHYSICS CLASSES

TIRUPATI.
CELL NO.9440025125.
CHAPTERWISE SUPER THIRTY PHYSICS PROBLEMS FOR JEE MAIN
TRANSFERENCE OF HEAT
SL NO PROBLEM SOLUTION
1a A block of steel heated to 100 0C is left in a room to cool. Temperature decays exponentially with time.
Which of the curves shown in the figure represents the
decrease of temperature with time?
a) A
b) B
c) C
d) None of these
2b In Ingen Hausz experiment the wax melts up to 5 cm and In Ingen Hausz experiment
10 cm on bars A and B, respectively. The ratio of the K  (length)2
thermal conductivities of A and B is k1  5  1
2
a) 1 : 2  =  =
b) 1 : 4 k 2  10  4
c) 1 : 8
d) 1 : 16
3b Two vessels A and B of different materials are similar in Q  dT 
shape and size. The same quantity of ice filled in them t = kA  dx 
 
melts in time t1 and t2 respectively. The ratio of the
mL  dT 
thermal conductivities of A and B is  = kA  
a) t1 : t2 t  dx 
b) t2 : t1 1
 k
c) t12 : t22 t
d) t22 : t12 k1 t2
 =
k2 t1
4d A planet having average surface temperature T0 is at an Energy received per second by the planet =
average distance d from the sun. Assuming that the P
( R 2 ) where P is power radiated by the sun
planet receives radiant energy from the sun only and it 4 d 2
loses radiant energy only from its surface and neglecting and R is the radius of the planet. Further, energy
all other atmospheric effects we conclude radiated per second by the planet (according to
a) T0  d2
Stefan’s law) is σ(4πR2) T04 . For thermal equilibrium
b) T0  d-2
c) T0  d1/2 to exist, we get
d) T0  d-1/2 P
( R 2 ) = σ(4πR2) T04
4 d 2
 T04  d −2
 T0  d −1/2
A S H O K A P H Y S I C S C L A S S E S , T I R U P A T I . C E L L N O . 9 4 4 0 0 2 5 1 2 5 . 1 | 95
5c Two rods of the same material have diameters in the 2
(Q / t )1  r1  2
ratio 1 : 2 and length in the ratio 2 : 1. If the temperature = 
difference between their ends is the same, the ratio of (Q / t ) 2  r2  1
the heats conducted by them in a given time is 1 1 1
a) 1 : 4
 Ratio = x =
4 2 8
b) 4 : 1
c) 1 : 8
d) 8 : 1
6d Water is being boiled in a flat bottomed kettle placed on mL kA(T1 − T2 )
a stove. The area of the bottom is 300 cm2 and the =
t d
thickness is 2 mm. If the amount of steam produced is 1 g mLd
min-1, then the difference of the temperature between  T1 – T2 =
the inner and the outer surfaces of the bottom is KAt
(thermal conductivity of the material of the kettle = 0.5   1  (540)(0.2)
T1 – T2 =  
-1 -1 0 -1
cal cm s C , latent heat of the steam is equal to 540  60  (0.5)(300)
-1
calg )  T1 – T2 = 0.012 0C
0
a) 12 C
b) 1.2 0C
c) 0.12 0C
d) 0.012 0C
7c A and B are two points on a uniform metal ring whose When θ = 1800, then thermal resistance of each
centre is O. The angle AOB = θ. A and B are maintained at R R
two different constant temperatures. When θ = 1800, the branch is 2 . So, net thermal resistance is 4 .
rate of total heat flow from A to B is 1.2 W. When θ = 900, Further
this rate will be
a) 0.6 watt
b) 0.9 watt
c) 1.6 watt
d) 1.8 watt
T
Thermal current =
Rnet
T
 1.2 =
R
 
4
 ΔT = 0.3R
When θ = 900, then thermal resistance of one branch
R 3R
is and that of other is and both are in
4 4
parallel.
 R   3R 
  
 Rnet =  4   4  3R
=
R 3R 16
+
4 4
T
 I’ =
 3R 
 
 16 
(0.3R)16
 I’ =
3R
 I’ = 1.6 W
8b A point source of heat of power P is placed at the centre Area of the shell = 4πR2
of a spherical shell of mean radius R. The material of the 2 T
shell has thermal conductivity k. If the temperature Rate of flow of heat = P = k(4πR ) d
difference between the outer and the inner surface of the
4 R 2Tk
shell is not to exceed T, then the thickness of the shell  d=
should not be less than P
2 R 2 kT
a)
P
4 R 2 kT
b)
P
 R kT
2
c)
P
 R 2 kT
d)
4P
9c The thermal conductivities of copper, mercury and glass Q T
are, respectively, KC, KM and KG such that KC > KM > KG. If = kA
t
the same quantity of heat flows per second per unit area 1
of each and the corresponding temperature gradients are  k
XC, XM and XG, then  T 
 
a) XC = XM = XG  
b) XC > XM > XG 1
 k
c) XC < XM < XG Temperature Gradient
d) XM > XC > XG
Since
KC > KM > KG
 XC < XM < XG
10b The plots of intensity verses wavelength for three black According to Wien’s Displacement Law
bodies at temperature T1, T2 and T3 respectively are as λmT = constant
shown. Their temperatures are such that since, λ1 < λ3 < λ2
 T1 > T3 > T 2
a) T1 > T2 > T 3
b) T1 > T3 > T 2
c) T2 > T3 > T 1
d) T3 > T2 > T 1
11b, d A planet having surface temperature T K has a solar
constant S. An angle θ is subtended by the sun at the
planet.
a) S  T2
b) S  T4
c) S  θ0
d) S  θ2
Power radiated by the sun is

P = (4πR2)σT4
Further,
 Energy received per  P
Solar constant =  = =s
 sec ond per unit area  4 d
2
 P = 4πd2S
For equilibrium
 4πR2σT4 = 4πd2S
2
1  2R  1  2R 
 S= T 4   = T 
4 2
 =
4  d  4  d 
 S T 4
 S 2
12b A system S receives heat continuously from an electrical (Rate of Loss of Heat)  (Temperature Difference)
heater of power 10 W. The temperature of S becomes dQ
constant at 50 0C when the surrounding temperature is   T − T0
dt
20 0C. After the heater is switched off, S cools from 35.1  10 = β(50 – 20)
0
C to 34.9 0C in 1 minute. The heat capacity of S is 1
a) 750 J(0C)-1  β=
b) 1500 J(0C)-1 3
(where β is just a constant of proportionality)
c) 3000 J(0C)-1
At average temperature of 35 0C we have
d) 6000 J(0C)-1
dQ 1
=  (35 − 20) = (15) = 5 Js-1
dt 3
So, heat lost in a time of one minute (= 60 second) is
Qtotal = 5 x 60 = 300 J
By definition, Heat Capacity
Qtotal 300
c= = = 1500 J(0C)-1
T 0.2
13d An object is at the temperature of 400 0C. At what E = σ(673)4
temperature would it radiate twice as fast? The 2E = σT4 …(1)
temperature of the surroundings may be assumed to be  T = 21/4(673)
negligible  T = 1.18(673)
a) 200 0C  T  800 K
b) 200 K
c) 200 F
d) 800 K
14c The temperature of an isolated body of mass m, gram dT
specific heat c falls from T1 to T2 in time t. −mc = T 4
dt
 -mcT-4dT = σdt
mc  1 1  
T2 t
−  T −4 dT =
mc 0
a) t=  3− 3  dt
  T2 T1  T1
2mc  1 1   T −3  
T2
b) t=  3− 3  − = t
  T2 T1   −3T1 
mc

mc  1 1 
c) t=  3− 3 mc  1 1 
3  T2 T1   t=  3− 3
3  T2 T1 
3  1 1 
d) t=  3− 3
mc  T2 T1 
15c A closed cubical box made of perfectly insulating material  Heat   Heat   Heat 
has wall of thickness 8 cm and the only way for heat to      
enter or leave the box is through two solid metal plugs A 
conducted   generated   conducted 
+ =
and B, each of cross-sectional area 12 cm2 and length 8  in at A   by source   out at B 
cm fixed in the opposite walls of the box as shown in the  per sec ond   per sec ond   per sec ond 
figure. Outer surface A is kept at 100 0C. The thermal      
conductivity of the material of the plugs is 0.5 cals-1 cm-1 (0.5)(12)(100 − T ) (0.5)(12)(T − 4)
+ 36 =
(0C)-1. A source of energy generating 36 cals-1 is enclosed 8 8
inside the box. The equilibrium temperature of the inner Solving the above equation for T, we have
surface of the box (assuming that it is same at all points T = 76 0C
on the inner surface)
a) 38 0C
b) 57 0C
c) 76 0C
d) 85 0C
16a While measuring the thermal conductivity of a liquid, we Conceptual
keep the upper part hot and the lower cool because
a) It stops convection
b) It stops radiation
c) Heat conduction is easier downwards
d) It is easier and more convenient to do so
17b A black body at 227 0C radiates heat at the rate of 5 E
 727 + 273 
4
-1 -2 -1 -2
cals cm . The rate of heat radiated in cals cm at 727 C0 2
= 
is E1  227 + 273 
4
a) 40 E2  1000 
b) 80 =  = 16
E1  500 
c) 160
d) 240  E2 = 16 x 5
 E2 = 80 cals-1 cm-2
18a A graph is drawn between λ and Eλ. The area A under the Conceptual
graph is related to the absolute temperature T as
a) A  T4
b) A  T2
c) A  T-2
d) A  T-4
19b Three rods A, B and C of same length and cross-sectional
area are joined in series. Their thermal conductivities are
in the ratio 1 : 2 : 1.5. If the open ends of A and C are at
200 0C and 18 0C, respectively. At equilibrium, the
temperature at the junction of A and B is
a) 74 0C kA(200 − T1 ) 2kA(T1 − T2 ) 1.5kA(T2 − 18)
b) 116 0C = =
c) 156 0C  200 – T1 = 2T1 – 2T2
d) 148 0C  3T1 – 2T2 = 200 …(1)
Further,
3
200 – T1 = (T2 − 18)
2

2T1 + 3T2 = 454
Solving (1) and (2), we get …(2)
T1 = 116 0C
20a Four rods of same material but different radii r and Since all have same k (as they are made of same
lengths l are used to connect two reservoirs of heat at material)
different temperatures. The one which will conduct most Q
heat is So, the rod which has maximum will conduct the
t
a) r = 2 cm, l = 0.5 m 2
Q r
b) r = 2 cm, l = 2 m most. Here 
c) r = 1 cm, l = 1 m t
d) R = 0.5 cm, l = 0.5 cm
21a The rate of radiation from a black body at 0 0C is E. Then E = σ(0 + 273)4
the rate of radiation from this black body at 273 0C will be E’ = σ(273 + 273)4
a) 16E  E’ = 16E
b) 8E
c) 4E
d) E
22a, d One end of the metal rod of area A and length l is kept in Q  T − TR 
steam. A steady state is reached after some time in which = KA  S 
t  
the amount of heat passing through any cross-section of
TS = Temperature of steam
rod per second is Q. Q will increase if
TR = Temperature of room
a) A is increased
TR = Temperature of room
b) l is increases
c) The room temperature is increased
Q
T0 increase either A is increased or l is decreased
d) The room temperature is decreased t
or TR is decreased.
23d The thermal conductivity of the plate depends upon Conceptual
a) The temperature difference between the two
sides
b) The thickness of the plate
c) The area of the plate
d) None of the above
24a A polished metal plate with a rough black spot on it is Due to Kirchhoff’s Laws
heated to about 1400 K and quickly taken to dark room.
Then the spot
a) Will appear brighter than the plate
b) Will appear darker than the plate
c) And the plate will appear equally bright
d) The plate will not be visible in dark room
25a Five rods having thermal conductivities k1, k2, k3, k4 and k5 Condition for a balanced Wheatstone Bridge.
are arranged as shown. The points A and B are k1 k3
maintained at different temperatures such that no =
k2 k4
thermal current flows through the central rod.
 k1k4 = k3k2
a) K1k4 = k3k2
b) K1 = k3, k2 = k4
c) K1k3 = k2k4
k1 k3
d) =
k4 k2
26a, b Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivities of 0.01 and Since both bodies emit total radiant power at the
0.81, respectively. The outer surface areas of two bodies same rate.
are the same. The two bodies emit total radiant power at 
the same rate. The wavelength λB corresponding to
eA TA4 = eB TB4 ( ) ( )
maximum spherical spectral radiance in the radiation  0.01 TA4 = 0.81 TB4 ( ) ( )
from B is shifted from the wavelength corresponding to  TA = 3TB
the maximum spectral radiance in from A by 1.00 µm. If 1 1
the temperature of A is 5802 K, then  TB = TA = (5802 K )
a) The temperature of B is 1934 K
3 3
 TB = 1934 K
b) λB = 1.5 µm
1
c) The temperature of B is 11604 K A = B (due to Wien’s Law)
d) The temperature of B is 2901 K 3
Since
λB – λA = 1 µm
B
 λB – = 1 µm
3
2
 B = 1 µm
3
 λB = 1.5 µm
27b Two spherical black bodies of radii r1 and r2 and with P1 = P2
surface temperatures T1 and T2 respectively radiate the   AT
1 1 =  A2T2
4 4
r1
same power. must be equal to  4 r12T14 = 4 r22T24
r2 2
r1  T2 
 = 
2
 T1 
a)   r2  T1 
 T2 
2
 T2 
b)  
 T1 
4
 T1 
c)  
 T2 
4
 T2 
d)  
 T1 
28c It is hotter for the same distance over the top of the Conceptual
flame than it is on one side of it as
a) More heat is radiated upwards
b) Air conducts more heat upwards
c) Convection takes heat upwards
d) Some other reason not mentioned here
29a A black body radiates power P and maximum energy is λmT = constant
radiated by it around a wavelength λ0. The temperature 4
of the black body is now changed such that it radiates  T = T0
3
30
maximum energy around the wavelength . The Since
4 P  T 4 (from Stefan’s Law)
power radiated by it now is 256
256  Pnew = P
a) P 81
81
16
b) P
9
64
c) P
27
4
d) P
3
30c A spherical black body of radius r0 radiates a power P at P  AT4
temperature T0. Another spherical black body of radius
r0
and at temperature 2T0 emits a power
2
a) P
b) 2P
c) 4P
d) 8P
HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS

1d The Bulk modulus of a diatomic gas at atmospheric Bulk modules under conditions is given by
pressure is Bad = γP
-2
a) 0 Nm 7
b) 1 Nm-2  Bad = (105) = 1.4 x 105 Nm-2
5
c) 1.4 x 104 Nm-2
d) 1.4 x 105 Nm-2
2b A gas, is heated at constant pressure. The fraction of heat dW dQ − dU
supplied used for external work is =
dQ dQ
1 { From First Law dQ = dU + dW}
a)
 dW dU
 = 1−
 1 dQ dQ
b) 1 − 
  
dW nC dT
= 1− V
c) γ–1 dQ nCP dT
 1  dW C
d) 1 − 2   = 1− V
   dQ CP
dW 1
 = 1−
dQ 
3b Mean free path of the molecules of a gas depends on the Conceptual
pressure P as
a) P
b) P-1
c) P-2
d) P2
4a A piece of glass is heated to a high temperature and then Conceptual
allowed to cool. If it cracks, a possible reason for this is
the following property of the glass
a) Low thermal conductivity
b) High thermal conductivity
c) High specific heat
d) Low specific
5c The temperature of source and sink of a Carnot Engine 300
are 327 0C and 27 0C, respectively. The efficiency of the  = 1 − 600 = 0.5
engine is
 27 
a) 1–  
 327 
27
b)
327
c) 0.5
d) 0.7
6a, c A body of mass m has gram specific heat c. Water equivalent (w) of a body of mass m, gram
a) Heat capacity of the body is mc specific heat c is just the product of m and c i.e. w =
b) Water equivalent of the body is m mc. Similarly, heat capacity of a body of mass m,
c) Water equivalent of the body is mc gram specific heat c is also product of m and c. The
d) Heat capacity of the body is c major difference between both is that w is expressed
in the units of mass and heat capacity is expressed in
the units of energy (calorie or joule).
7a, b For a gas if CP is the specific heat at constant pressure, CV CP 2
is the specific heat at constant volume, R is the Universal Since γ = C = 1 + f
V
Gas constant and f be the degrees of freedom then
2 CP − CV
2CV  =
a) f = f CV
R
C  2C
b) f = 2  P − 1  f = V { CP - CV = R}
 R 
R
f =
CV C 
c)  f = 2  P − 1
R  R 
CP
d) f = −1
R
8a A gas undergoes a process in which its pressure P and dQ
volume V are related as PVn = constant, where n is a C= =0
dT
constant. If  =
CP
, then molar heat capacity for the gas  Adiabatic process
CV CP
 n=γ=
in this process is zero for CV
a) n = γ
b) n = γ – 1
c) n = γ + 1
d) n = 1 – γ
9b R 2 3
For a gas = . Possibly the gas is Since CP = R
CP 3 2
a) Diatomic 1
 CV = R
b) Monatomic 2
c) A mixture of diatomic and monatomic  γ=3
d) Polyatomic 2
Since γ = 1 +
f
 f=1
Possible for a monatomic gas molecule moving in a
straight fixed line (one degrees of freedom).
10d Two rods of length L2 and coefficient of linear expansion Let h be the distance of the apex from the middle of
α2 are connected freely to a third rod of length L1 of the base. Further by Pythagoras theorem
coefficient of linear expansion α1 to form an isosceles L12
triangle. The arrangement is supported on the knife edge L2
2 − = h2 = constant
4
at the midpoint of L1 which is horizontal. The apex of the
 L12 
isosceles triangle is to remain at a constant distance from 
( )
 h =  L2 −   
2 2
( )
the knife edge if  4
L1  2
a) =  0 = 2L2ΔL2 –
1
(2L1ΔL1)
L2 1 4
L1 2 
1
b) = L2(L2α2ΔT) = L1(L1α1ΔT)
L2 1 4
  L1 1 L 1 
 1 = and 2 = 2
L1
c) =2 2 
L2 1  L1 T L2 T 
L1  L1 
d) =2 2  =2 2
L2 1 L2 1
11d A sealed container with negligible coefficient of E2 327 + 273
expansion contained helium. When it is heated from 27 = =2
0
E1 27 + 273
C to 327 0C, the average kinetic energy of helium
becomes
a) 12 times
b) 8 times
c) 4 times
d) 2 times
12c A substance of mass M kg requires an input power P watt Since ML = Pt
to remain in the molten state at its melting point. When Pt
the power source is turned off, the sample completely  L=
M
solidifies in time t second. The specific latent heat of
fusion of the substance is
2Pt
a)
M
Pt
b)
2M
Pt
c)
M
PM
d)
t
13c Two metal rods having same length and area of cross- For equilibrium F1 – F2 = 0
section are fixed end to end between two rigid supports.  Y1α1AΔT – Y2α2 AΔT = 0
The coefficient of linear expansion of the rods are α1 and  Y1α1 = Y2α2
α2 and their respective Young’s moduli are Y1 and Y2. The
system is now cooled and it is observed that the junction
between the rods does not shift at all for the condition.
a) Y1α2 = Y2α1
b) Y112 = Y2 22
c) Y1α1 = Y2α2
d) Y1 22 = Y212
14a, c  7  Let the process start from initial pressure PA, volume
Three moles of an ideal gas  CP = R  at pressure PA VA and temperature TA.
 2 
and temperature TA is isothermally expanded to twice its
initial volume. It is then compressed at constant pressure
to its original volume. Finally the gas is compressed at
constant volume to its original pressure PA. The correct P
– T diagrams indicating the process are
I. Isothermal expansion (PV = constant) at
temperature TA to twice the initial volume VA
PA
II. Compression at constant pressure to
2
original volume VA (i.e. V  T)
III. Isochoric process (at volume VA) to initial
conditions (i.e. P  T)
15b The first law of thermodynamics is concerned with the Conceptual

conservation of
a) Number of molecules
b) Energy
c) Number of moles
d) Temperature
16a A steel rod of length L0 has a cross-sectional area A. The Stress F/A
force required to stretch this rod by the same amount as Y= =
Strain L / L0
the expansion produced by heating it through ΔT is
F/A
(Coefficient of linear expansion of steel is α and Young’s  Y= { ΔL/L0 = αΔT}
Modulus for steel is Y) T
a) YAαΔT  F = YAαΔT
1
b) YAαΔT
2
c) 2YAαΔT
d) None of these
17a, b CP is always greater than CV due to the fact that Conceptual
a) No work is being done on heating the gas at
constant volume
b) When a gas absorbs heat at constant pressure its
volume must change so as to do some external
work
c) The internal energy is a function of temperature
only for an ideal gas
d) For the same rise of temperature, the internal
energy of a gas changes by a smaller amount at
constant volume that an constant pressure.
18a A vessel contains a mixture of one mole of oxygen and A diatomic molecule has 5 degree of freedom out of
two moles of nitrogen at 300 K. The ratio of the average which 3 are translational degrees of freedom and
rotational kinetic energy per oxygen molecule to per remaining 2 are rotational degrees of freedom.
nitrogen molecule is According to Theorem of Equipartition of Energy, the
a) 1 : 1 energy associated with each degree of freedom per
b) 1 : 2 1
c) 2 : 1 molecule of a gas in thermal equilibrium is KBT,
2
d) Depends on the moment of inertia of the two where KB is the Boltzmann constant. So, the average
molecules rotational kinetic energy associated with each O2
1 
molecule is 2  K BT  = K BT . Similarly, average
2 
rotational kinetic energy associated with each N2
1 
molecule is 2  K BT  = K BT . So, the ratio
 2 
amounts to 1 : 1.
However, if we are asked to compare the total
rotational kinetic energy associated with 1 mole O2
gas to that with 2 mole of energy associated with 1
mole O2 gas to that with 2 mole of N2 gas, then our
answer would have been 1 : 2
19b A gas behaves as an ideal gas Conceptual
a) At low pressure and high temperature
b) At very low pressure and high temperature
c) High pressure and low temperature
d) High pressure and high temperature
20a An ideal gas is taken through A → B → C → A, as shown in dU = 0
figure. If the net heat supplied to the gas in the cycle is 5  By First Law of Thermodynamics
J, the work done by the gas in the process C → A is dQCyclic = dWCyclic
since B → C is an isochoric process
 dWB→C = 0 { dV = 0}
 5 = dWA→B + dWB→C + dWC→A
 5 = 10(2 – 1) + 0 + dWC→A
 dWC→A = - 5 J
a) -5J
b) - 10 J
c) - 15 J
d) - 20 J
21b  7  For adiabatic process
The pressure and density of a diatomic gas   =   
 5 1 1 = PV
PV 2 2
 
 2  m m
change adiabatically from (P1, ρ1) to (P2, ρ2). If   =  P1   = P2  
 1   1   2 
  
P1 P
= 2
32, then  1  is 
1 2
 2 

a) 128 P1  P1 
1  = 
b) P2  2 
128 7/5
c) 32 P1  1 
 = 
d) None of these P2  32 
P1 1 1
 = 7 =
P2 2 128
22b A cyclic process is shown in the p – T diagram. Which of Conceptual
the curves show the same process on a V – T diagram?
23d A wire of length L0 is supplied heat to raise its 

temperature by T. If γ is the coefficient of volume Since,  = 3
expansion of the wire and Y is the Young’s modulus of the
wire then the energy density stored in the wire is ( Stress ) 2 1
1 2 2 Energy Density = = Y(Strain)2
a)  T Y 2Y 2
2  T
1 2 2 Strain = = T =  T =
b)  T Y 3
3 Y T  Stress 
1  2T 2  Stress = Y(Strain) =  Y= 
c) 3  Strain 
18 Y 1 Y 2 2T 2 1 2 2
1 2 2  U= =  T Y
d)  T Y 2 9Y 18
18
24b The average degrees of freedom per molecule for a gas is 2
6. The gas performs 25 J of work when it expands at  = 1 + f
constant pressure. The heat absorbed by gas is
4
a) 75 J  = { f = 6}
b) 100 J 3
c) 150 J dW = 25 J
d) 125 J By First Law of Thermodynamics
dQ = dU + dQ
where
dQ = nCPdT
dU = nCVdT
dW = PdV = nRdT
Also,
dW dQ − dU
= {Using First Law}
dQ dQ
dW dU
 = 1−
dQ dQ
dW nC dT
 = 1− V
dQ nCP dT
dW C
 = 1− V
dQ CP
dW  1 
 = 1 − 
dQ   

dQ = 25 x 4 = 100 J
25a In a given process of an ideal gas, dW = 0 and dQ < 0. dW = 0
Then for the gas  Isochoric process
a) The temperature will decrease  dQ = dU (by First Law of Thermodynamics)
b) The volume will increase Since dQ < 0
c) The pressure will remain constant  dU < 0
d) The temperature will increase  There must be a fall in temperature
26c The average translational kinetic energy of O2 (relative K.E.  T
molar mass 32) molecules at a particular temperature is Since temperature does not change, so K.E. remains
0.048 eV. The translational kinetic energy of N2 (relative constant
molar mass 28) molecules in eV at the same temperature
is
a) 0.0015
b) 0.003
c) 0.048
d) 0.768
27b A cycle process ABCD is shown in the P – V diagram. Conceptual
Which of the following curves represent the same
process?
28c 3.2 kg of ice at -10 0C just melts with a mass m of steam Let m gram of steam be required for the purpose.
a) m = 400 g By law of calorimetry
b) m = 800 g
c) m = 425 g  Total heat lost   Total heat gained 
d) m = 900 g    
 by steam to become  =  by ice to become 
 water at 0 0C   water at 0 0C 
   
 540m + m(1)(00 – 0) = 3200(0.5)(10) + 3200(80)
 640m = 272000
 m = 425 g
29c The plot of isotherms will not be a straight line when a For an Isotherm T = constant
plot is drawn between  PV = constant
a) PV and V  PV vs V is a straight line. {OPTION (a)}
b) S (entropy) and T Similarly S vs T is a straight line {OPTION (b)}
c) V and P V and P plotted together must give a rectangular
d) P and T hyperbola (PV = constant). P vs T will again be a
straight line. {OPTION (d)}
30d A monatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T1, is TV = T V  −1  −1
1 1 2 2
enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The 5 5
T1 ( AL1 ) 3 = T2 ( AL2 ) 3
−1 −1
gas is allowed to expand to a temperature T2 by releasing 
the piston suddenly. If L1 and L2 be the lengths of the gas 2
column before and after the expansion respectively, then T1  L2 3
T1  = 
is given by T2  L1 
T2
2
 L1  3
a)  
 L2 
L1
b)
L2
L2
c)
L1
2
 L2  3
d)  
 L1 
WAVES
1c A string stretched by a weight of 4 kg is vibrating in its 1 T
fundamental mode. The additional weight required to f =
produce an octave of the first is 2 m
a) 4 kg 1 T +W
2f =
b) 8 kg 2 m
c) 12 kg T + W m0 + m
d) 16 kg  4= =
T m
 m = 3m0 = 12 kg
2b The equation of a wave travelling in a string can be 2
written as y = 3 cos {π(100t – x)} where y and x are in cm k =  = 
and t is in second. Its wavelength is  λ = 2 cm
a) 100 cm
b) 2 cm
c) 5 cm
3d At t = 0, a transverse wave pulse in a wire is described by a
Y(x, t) = is another form of progressive
the function y = 2
6
where x and y are in metre. The ( x  vt ) 2 + b
x −3 wave equation propagating with a speed v.
function y(x, t) that describes this wave equation if it is Negative sign to be taken for propagation along + x-
travelling in the positive x direction with a speed of 4.5 axis and positive sign to be taken for propagation
ms-1 is along – x-axis.
6
a) y=
( x + 4.5t ) 2 − 3
6
b) y=
( x − 4.5t ) 2 + 3
6
c) y=
( x + 4.5t ) 2 + 3
6
d) y=
( x − 4.5t ) 2 − 3
4b A transverse wave of amplitude 0.5 m, wavelength 1 m  = 2 f = 4
and frequency 2 Hz is propagating in a string in the 2
negative x direction. The equation of this wave is k= = 2

a) Y = 0.5sin (2πx - 4πt)
 y = 0.5cos( t + kx )
b) Y = 0.5cos (2πx + 4πt)
c) Y = 0.5sin (πx – 2πt)
d) Y = 0.5cos (2πx + 2πt)
5a xx   x
  where y, Y = 4 sin   x + 16 
The equation of a wave is y = 4sin   2t +
2 
8   
x are in cm and time in second. The amplitude, 2 
Where  =  , k = =
wavelength, velocity and frequency of the wave are,  16
respectively, 
a) 4 cm, 32 cm, 16 cms-1, 1.5 Hz  v = = 16 cms-1
-1 k
b) 8 cm, 16 cm, 32 cms , 1.0 Hz Also
c) 4 cm, 32 cm, 32 cms-1, 0.5 Hz  =π
d) 8 cm, 16 cm, 16 cms-1, 1.0 Hz  2πf = π
 f = 0.5 Hz and λ = 32 cm
6b In PROBLEM 5, the phase difference between two  2 
positions of the same particle which are occupied at time  =   x
  
interval of 0.4 s is
2
a) 0.2 π   = (vt ) { Δx = vΔt}
b) 0.4 π 32
c) 0.6 π 2
  = (16 x0.4)
d) 0.8 π 32
  = 0.4
7c In PROBLEM 5, the phase difference at any instant 2
 = x
between two particles 12 cm apart is 
 2
a)
4   = (12)
32
 3
b)
2   =
4
3
c)
4
d) π
8c Two identical sonometer wires have a fundamental f' T + T T
frequency of 500 Hz when kept under the same tension. =  1+
The percentage increase in the tension of one wire that
f T 2T
would cause an occurrence of 5 bps, when both wires T f
 =2
vibrate together, is T f
a) 1% T  5 
b) 1.5%  = 2 
c) 2%
T  500 
T 2
d) 4%  =
T 100
So, %age change is 2%
9d The equation of a wave travelling on a string is y = 4sin  x
Y = 4 sin  4 t − 
  x   16 
  8t −   , where x, y are in cm and t in second. The
2  8  2 
Where ω = 4π and k = =
velocity of the wave is  16
a) 64 cms-1 in – x direction 
b) 32 cms-1 in – x direction  v= = 64 cms-1
k
c) 32 cms-1 in + x direction Along + x direction
d) 64 cms-1 in + x direction
10b Two speakers connected to the same source of fixed Path difference = S1M’ – S2M’
frequency are placed 2.0 m apart in a box. A sensitive  Δx = 5 – 3 = 2 m
microphone placed at a distance of 4.0 m from their For MAXIMA
midpoint along the perpendicular bisector shows 
maximum response. The box is slowly rotated until the Path difference = (Even multiple)
2
speakers are in line with the microphone. The distance

between the midpoint of the speakers and the  Δx = (2n)
microphone remains unchanged. Exactly five maximum 2
responses are observed in the microphone in doing this.
The wavelength of the sound wave is
a) 0.2 m
b) 0.4 m
c) 0.6 m
d) 0.8 m
For 5 maximum responses


 2 = 2(5)
2
2
 = 0.4 m
λ=
5
11c A person speaking normally produces a sound intensity of  I 
40 dB at a distance of 1 m. If the threshold intensity for dB = 10log10  
reasonable audibility is 20 dB, the maximum distance at  I0 
which he can be heard clearly is where I0 = 10-12 Wm-2
a) 4 m  I1 
b) 5 m since 40 = 10log10  
c) 10 m  I0 
d) 20 m I1
 = 104 ….(1)
I0
 I2 
Also 20 = 10log10  
 I0 
I2
 = 102 ….(2)
I0
I2 −2 r12
 = 10 = 2
I1 r2

r2 = 100 r1
2

r2 = 10 m { r1 = 1 m}
12a An engine is moving on a circular track with a constant Since there is no relative motion between the source
speed. It is blowing a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. The and listener, so apparent frequency equals original
frequency received by an observer standing stationary at frequency
the centre of the track is
a) 500 Hz
b) More than 500 Hz
c) Less than 500 Hz
d) More or less than 500 Hz depending on the
actual speed of the engine.
13b The frequency of a radar is 780 MHz. When it is reflected  c−v 
from an approaching aeroplane, the apparent frequency f ' = f  c + v 
 
is more than the actual frequency by 2.6 kHz. The speed
 2v 
of the aeroplane is  f’ – f =  f
a) 0.25 kms -1
c−v 
b) 0.5 kms-1 Where c is velocity of waves emitted by radar i.e. c is
c) 1.0 kms-1 velocity of light.
d) 2.0 kms-1 2v
 f’ – f  f { c – v = c}
c
2v
 2.6 x 103 = x780 x106
3x108
(3x108 )(2.6 x103 )
 v=
2 x780 x106
v = 0.5 x 103 ms-1
v = 0.5 kms-1
14a Two tuning forks of frequencies 256 Hz and 258 Hz are vb = 2 Hz
sounded together. The time interval, between two 1
consecutive maxima heard by an observer is  tb = s
2
a) 0.5 s
b) 2 s
c) 250 s
d) 252 s
15b The frequency of the whistle of an engine is 600 Hz. It is  v−0 
moving with a speed of 30 ms-1 towards a stationary f ' = f  
observer. The apparent frequency is (speed of sound is  v − vs 
330 ms-1)  330 
 f’ = 600  
a) 630 Hz  300 
b) 660 Hz  f’ = 660 Hz
c) 570 Hz
d) 540 Hz
16b Two sounding bodies producing progressive waves given Y1 = 4 sin[2π(200)t]
by y1 = 4 sin(400πt) and y2 = 3 sin(404πt), where t is in And y2 = 3 sin[2π(202)t]
seconds, are situated near the ears of a person. The Number of beats per second = 2 bps
person will hear 4+3
2
I  
4  max
=  = 49
a) 2 beats per second with intensity ratio I min  4−3
3
between maxima and minima
b) 2 beats per second with intensity ratio 49
c) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 7
4
d) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio
3
17b Two loudspeakers L1 and L2, driven by a common Let, Δx = Path Difference
oscillator and amplifier, are arranged as shown. The  Δx = L2P – L1P
frequency of the oscillator is gradually increased from
 Δx = 40 + 9 − 40
2 2
zero and the detector at D records a series of maxima and
minima. If the speed of sound is 330 ms-1 then the  Δx = 41 – 40
frequency at which the first maximum is observed is  Δx = 1 m
For first maximum

Δx = (2n) where n 1
2

 1 = 2(1)
2
 λ=1m
v
 f= = 330 Hz
a) 165 Hz 
b) 330 Hz
c) 495 Hz
d) 660 Hz
18a If the tension in a string stretched between two fixed 1 T
points is made four times, the frequency of the second F=
harmonic will become 2 m
a) Two times T becomes 4T, so f becomes 2f i.e. all harmonics and
b) Three times overtones are multiplied by a factor of 2.
c) Four times
d) Six times
19b, c, d The velocity of sound in air is affected by change in the Conceptual
a) Atmospheric pressure
b) Moisture content of air
c) Temperature of air
d) Composition of air
20b A train is moving at 30 ms-1 in still air. The frequency of For Listener in the front
the locomotive whistle is 500 Hz and the speed of sound  v 
is 345 ms-1. The apparent wavelengths of sound in front f '= f  
of and behind the locomotive are respectively  v − vS 
a) 0.63 m, 0.80 m v  v − vS 
b) 0.63 m, 0.75 m  '=  
f ' f 
c) 0.60 m, 0.85 m
345 − 30
d) 0.60 m, 0.75 m  '=
500
 λ’ = 0.63 m
For Listener at the back
 v 
f '= f  
 v + vS 
v v + vS
 '= =
f' f
345 + 30
 '=
500

λ’ = 0.75 m
21a In PROBLEM 20, what would be the apparent In front of locomotive the effective sound velocity is
wavelengths as heard by stationary listeners in front of v’ = v + vw
and behind the locomotive if a wind of speed 10 ms-1 So,
were blowing in the same direction as that in which the  ( v + vW ) − 0 
locomotive is travelling? f '= f  
a) 0.65 m, 0.73 m  ( v + vW ) − vS 
b) 0.60 m, 0.73 m (345 + 10) − 30 325
c) 0.65 m, 0.78 m
'= =
500 500
d) 0.60 m, 0.71 m
 v ' v + vW 
 '= = 
 f' f' 
 λ’ = 0.65 m
At the back of the train the effective value of velocity
of sound is
V’ = v – vW
 v − vW 
 f '= f  
 ( v − vW ) + vS 
 (345 − 10) + 30 
 '=  
 500
365  v ' v − vW 
 '=  '= = 
500  f' f' 
 λ’ = 0.73 m
22b An organ pipe P1, closed at one end and vibrating in its  v 
first overtone, and another pipe P2 open at both ends and P1 = 3fC = 3  
vibrating in its third overtone, are in resonance with a 4 C 
given tuning fork. The ratio of the length of P1 to that of  v 
P2 is P 2 = 4f O = 4  
8 2 O 
a) Where lC and lO are lengths of closed and open organ
3 pipe respectively.
3 Since both are in resonance, so
b)
8  v   v 
c)
1 3  = 4 
2 4 C  2 O 
3
d)
1  C
=
3 O 8
23c Choose the correct statement(s) Conceptual
a) Sound waves are transverse waves
b) Sound waves travel fastest through vacuum
c) Sound waves travel faster in solids than in gases
d) Sound waves travel faster in gases than in
liquids.
24d A wave is reflected from a rigid support. The change of Conceptual
phase on reflection will be
a) 0

b)
4

c)
2
d) π
25d A man standing in front of a mountain beats a drum at For not hearing the echo the time interval between
regular intervals. The rate of drumming is generally the beats of drum must be equal to time of echo
increased and he finds that the echo is not heard 2d 60
distinctly when the rate becomes 40 per minute. He then  t1 = = …(1)
v 40
moves nearer to the mountain by 90 m and finds that 2(d − 90)
echo is again not heard when the drumming rate And t2 = =1
becomes 60 per minute. The distance between the v
 2d – 180 = v …(2)
mountain and the initial position of the man is
a) 205 m From (1), we get
b) 300 m 3
2d = v. Substituting in (2), we get
c) 180 m 2
d) 270 m 3
 v – 180 = v
2
v
 180 =
2
 v = 360 ms-1
2(d ) 3
 =
360 2
 d = 270 m
26a A source of sound in moving with a constant speed of 20  v−0 
ms-1 emitting a note of a fixed frequency. The ratio of the fapproach =  f
frequencies observed by a stationary observer when the  v − vS 
source is approaching him and after it has crossed him is 340
fapproach = f
a) 9 : 8 320
b) 8 : 9 Also,
c) 10 : 9  v−0 
d) 9 : 10 frecede =  f
 v + vS 
 340 
 frecede =  f
 360 
f approach 360 9
 = =
f recede 320 8
27b A wave of frequency 500 Hz has a velocity 360 ms-1. The  2 
distance between two nearest points which are 600 out of  =   x
  
phase, is
 2  v 360 
 = =
a) 0.7 cm  = x 
b) 12 cm 3  360   f 500 
 
c) 70 cm  500 
d) 120 cm 120
 x = m
1000
 Δx = 12 cm
0
28a A column of air at 51 C and a tuning fork produce 4 bps Since on decreasing the temperature, velocity of
when sounded together. As the temperature of the air sound also decreases (v  T ) and hence frequency
column is decreased, the number of bps tends to of air column also decreases. Since beat frequency
decrease and when the temperature is 16 0C, the two also decreases hence it is obvious that the frequency
produce 1 bps. The frequency of the fork is of air column must be higher than that of fork. Let f
a) 50 Hz be the frequency of fork, then
b) 75 Hz
c) 100 Hz f + 4 V51 273 + 51 18
d) 150 Hz = = =
f + 1 V16 273 + 16 17
 f = 50 Hz
-2
29a The intensity in Wm of a 70 dB noise is  I 
a) 10-5 dB = 10log10  
b) 10-7  I0 
c) 105 where I0 = 10-12Wm-2
d) 107  I 
 70 = 10log10  
 I0 
I
 = 107
I0
 I = 10-5Wm-2
30c A car, sounding a horn of frequency 1000 Hz, is moving  v − ( − vS ) 
directly towards a huge wall at a speed of 15 ms-1. If f '= f  
speed of sound is 340 ms-1, then the frequency of the  v − vS 
echo heard by the driver is  v + vS 
a) 1046 Hz  f’ = f  
b) 954 Hz  v − vS 
c) 1092 Hz  340 + 15 
 f’ = 1000  
d) 908 Hz  340 − 15 
 f’ = 1092 Hz
OSCILLATIONS
1b Figure shows a mass m suspended with a massless If l0 is the extension of spring in equilibrium, then
inextensible string passing over a frictionless pulley. The Kl0 = mg
other end of string is connected a spring of force constant If y is downward displacement of mass from
K, whose other end is connected to a rigid floor. If mass I equilibrium, then spring is stretched upward by y.
stretched a little and allowed to vibrate; the time period Restoring force F = -Ky
of oscillations of mass is  ma = -Ky
K
a= − y
m
K
 2 =
m
2 m
So, time period t = = 2
 K
K
a) 2
m
m
b) 2
K
2m
c) 2
K
m
d) 2
2K
2a A mass M is attached to four springs of spring constants (2 K )(2 K )
2K, 2K, K, K as shown in figure. The mass is capable of K eff = +K+K
2K + 2K
oscillating on a frictionless horizontal floor. If it is  Keff = 3K
displaced slightly and released, the frequency of resulting
S.H.M> would be 1 3K
 f=
2 M
1 3K
a)
2 M
1 4K
b)
2 M
1 11K
c)
2 2M
1 2K
d)
2 3M
3c Two pendulums of lengths 1 m and 16 m are in phase at s t −  t = 2
mean position at a certain instant of time. If T is time 2 2
period of shorter pendulum, the minimum time after
T
t−
4T
t = 2  T 
which they will again be in phase is
 1
a)
T  t 1 −  =T
3  4
2T 4T
b)  t=
3 3
4T
c)
3
8T
d)
3
4a Two springs fixed at one end are stretched by 5 cm and m
10 cm, respectively, when masses 0.5 kg and 1 kg are T = 2
suspended at their lower ends. When displaced slightly k
from their mean positions and released, they will oscillate m  F
with time periods in the ratio
 T = 2  k= 
F/x  x
a) 1: 2 mx
b) 1:2  T = 2 { F = mg}
mg
c) 2 :1
d) 2:1 x
 T = 2
g
T1 x1 5 1
 = = =
T2 x2 10 2
5a k k kk
Two springs of force constant and are joined in ks = 1 2
5 4 k1 + k 2
series and then connected to a mass m. The frequency of kk
oscillation of the mass will be
1 k  ks = 5 4
k k
a) +
6 m 5 4
3 k k
b)  ks =
2 m 9
m
c)
1 k T = 2
2 m ks
2 k 9m
d)  T = 2
 20 m k
m
 T = 6
k
1 k
 f=
6 m
6b In PROBLEM 5, if the springs are connected in parallel, K K
the frequency of oscillation will be KP = +
5 4
3 k 9K
a)  KP =
2 m 20
3 k m
b) T = 2π
2 20 m 9k / 20
2 k 2 m
c)  T= 20
 20 m 3 k
3 k 3 k
d)  f=
 m 2 20 m
7a A particle executing S.H.M. of period 4 s. Then the time Remember that whenever motion starts from the
taken by it to move from the mean position to half the origin or mean position then x = a sin(ωt) and
amplitude starting from the mean position whenever it starts from extreme position then x = a
1 cos(ωt).
a) s This is due to the fact and a logical argument that
3
1 at t = 0, x = 0 for x = a sin (ωt) and
b) s at t = 0, x = a for x = a cos (ωt)
2 So,
2 a  2 t 
c) s  = a sin 
3 
2  T 
d) 4s
 2 t  1
 sin  =
 T  2
 2 t  
  t =
 T  6
T 1
 t= = s
12 3
8b A simple pendulum is suspended from the roof of a
trolley that moves freely down a plane of inclination α.
The time period of oscillation is
L
a) 2
g
L
b) 2
g cos 
Since the vehicle is moving down the frictionless
L incline, so the acceleration of the vehicle is g sin α
c) 2
g sin  along the incline. So the bob will experience a pseudo
force mg sin θ in the backward direction, as shown.
L
d) 2 The weight of the bob is mg acting vertically
g tan  downwards. If anet is the net acceleration of the bob
then,
anet = g 2 + g 2 sin 2  + 2( g )( g sin  ) cos(90 +  )
 anet = g 2 + g 2 sin 2  − 2 g 2 sin 2 
 anet = g 2 − g 2 sin 2 
 anet = g 1 − sin 2 
 anet = g cos α
L
Further T = 2
anet
L
 T = 2
g cos 
As a short cut if we think α → 0, then
L
T = 2 i.e. the time period of a simple pendulum
g
9d One end of a spring of force constant K is fixed to a Amplitude of motion A = 2x0
vertical wall and other to a body of mass m resting on a Time to cover from extreme position to mean
smooth horizontal surface. There is another wall at a position (i.e. from compressed position to normal
distance x0 from the body. The spring is then compressed T
by 2x0 and released. The time taken to strike the wall position) =
4
from its compressed position is Time taken to cover distance x0 from mean position is
calculate using
Y = A sin (ωt)
 2 t 
 x0 = 2x0 sin  
 T 
2 t 
 =
4 m T 6
a)  T
3 K  t=
12
5 m 
b)  So, total time taken to hit the wall
6 K T T  3 +1 T
t= + = T =
1 m 4 12  12  3
c) 
6 K T 1 m
2 m
 t= =  2 
d)  3 3 K
3 K
10d The ratio of the amplitudes of a simple harmonic Amplitude of y2 is
 A A2 A2
oscillations given by y1 = A sin(ωt) and y2 =   sin (ωt) + A2 =+
2 4 4
 A A
  cos (ωt) is  A2 =
2 2
a) 1 Also amplitude of y1 is
b) 2 A1 = A
1 A1
c)  = 2
2 A2
d) 2
11c When the potential energy of the particle executing 1
S.H.M. is one-fourth of its maximum value during the P.E. = 4 E
oscillation, the displacement of the particle from the
1 11 
equilibrium position in terms of its amplitude a is  m 2 x 2 =  m 2 a 2 
a 2 42 
a) a
4  x=
a 2
b)
3
a
c)
2
2a
d)
3
12b A mass m attached to a spring oscillates with a period of m
3 s. If the mass is increased by 1 kg the period increases 3 = 2π
by 1 s. The initial mass m in kg is
k
a)
7 m +1
3 + 1 = 2π
9 k
9 Solving we get
b)
7 9
14 m= kg
c) 7
9
18
d)
7
13a The total energy of the particle executing S.H.M. of Total Energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is
amplitude A s proportional to 1
a) A2 E = m 2 A2
2
b) A-2
c) A
d) A-1
14b A particle executes S.H.M. with frequency f. The Conceptual
frequency with which its kinetic energy oscillates is
a) 4f
b) 2f
c) f
f
d)
2
15a A system exhibiting S.H.M. must have Conceptual
a) Elasticity as well as inertia
b) Elasticity, inertia and an external force
c) Elasticity only
d) Inertia only
16d The period of a particle executing S.H.M. is 8 s. At t = 0 it At t = 0, the particle is at mean position, so
is at the mean position. The ratio of the distances X = a sin (ωt)
covered by the particle in the 1st second to the 2nd second  2 
is  x = a sin  t
8  
1
a)  
2 +1  x = a sin  t  is the displacement of the
4 
b) 2 particle from 0 → t s
1 Let x1 = Displacement of the particle from
c)
2 0→1s
And x2 = Displacement of the particle from
d) 2 +1
0→2s
 a
 x1 = a sin =
4 2
 x2 = a
Hence displacement of the particle from t = 1 s to t =
2 s is (x2 – x1)
 1 
 (x2 – x1) = a 1 − 
 2
a
x1 2 1
 = = = 2 +1
( x2 − x1 ) a 1 − 1  2 − 1
 
 2
17b A pan with a set of weights is attached to a light spring. m
The period of vertical oscillations is 0.5 s. When some 0.5 = 2
additional weights are put on the pan, the period of k
oscillations increases by 0.1 s. The extension caused by m + m'
0.6 = 2
the additional weights is k
a) 1.3 cm 0.36 m m '
b) 2.7 cm = +
c) 3.8 cm
4 2
k k
m ' 0.11
d) 5.5 cm  = 2
k 4
Let x be additional extension, then
m’g = kx
m'
 x= g
k
0.11
 x’ = (9.8)
4 2

x’ = 2.69 cm
18b A weakly damped harmonic oscillator of frequency n1 is On reaching the steady state the frequency of the
driven by an external periodic force of frequency n2. driven damped oscillator equals the frequency of the
When the steady state is reached, the frequency of the driver.
oscillator will be
a) n1
b) n2
1
c) (n1 + n2)
2
d) n1 + n2
19c A mass M is suspended from a spring of negligible mass. M
The spring is pulled a little and then released so that it T = 2
executes simple harmonic oscillations with a period T. If k
5T 5T M +m
the mass is increased by m, the period becomes . The = 2
4 4 k
m 5 M +m
ratio   is =
M  4 M
4 25 m
a)  = 1+
5 26 M
5 m 9
b)  =
4 M 16
9
c)
16
25
d)
16
20a d2y Conceptual
The equation of S.H.M. of a particle is + ky = 0 ,
dx 2
where k is a positive constant. The time period of motion
is given by
2
a)
k
2
b)
k
k
c)
2
k
d)
2
21b A simple pendulum is vibrating in an evacuated chamber. Conceptual
It will
a) Come to rest eventually
b) Oscillate forever with the same amplitude and
frequency
c) Oscillate with the same frequency but amplitude
will decrease with time
d) Oscillate with the same amplitude but frequency
will decrease with time
22c A particle of mass 0.5 kg executes S.H.M. Its energy is 1
0.04 J. If its time period is π second, its amplitude is E = m 2 A2
2
a) 10 cm
 2 
2
1
b) 15 cm  0.04 = (0.5) 
2
 (A )
c) 20 cm 2   
d) 40 cm 1
 0.04 = (4) A
2
4
A = 0.2 m
A = 20 cm
23c A particle executes S.H.M. with frequency f. The Let x = a sin(ωt)
frequency with which its kinetic energy oscillates is  x = v = aωcos(ωt)
f 1 2 1
a)  K.E. = mv = m 2 a 2 cos 2 (t )
2 2 2
b) f 1 2 1
 P.E. = kx = m a sin (t )
2 2 2
c) 2f
2 2
d) 4f X has a period T i.e. frequency f
T
Kinetic energy has a period i.e. frequency 2f
2
24b, d A cylindrical log of wood is floating in a large pool of For equilibrium, we have
water with its length normal to water’s surface. The log Weight of block = Upthrust on the immersed part of
has a radius r, mass m, length l and has density σ. If the the block
log is depressed below its equilibrium depth d (but not  mg = (Ad)ρg
beneath the surface of water) and then released it  m = Aρd
executes harmonic oscillations with time period T. m m
(Assume density of water to be ρ)  d= = 2
A  r 
m
a) T = 2  Re storing   Upthrust exp erienced by the 
2 rl g  = 
 force   additional part immersed 
2 m 
b) T= F = - Axρg
r  g  mx = - Axρg
m  (Aσl) x = - Axρg { m = (Al)σ}
c) d =
2 r  l g
 x+ x=0
d) d =
m 
 r2 
 T = 2
g
Since m = (πr2)lσ
m
 =
 r2
m
 T = 2
 r2 g
2 m
 T=
r  g
25d A simple harmonic oscillator has amplitude A and time 2 A
period T. Its maximum speed is vmax = Aω =
T
4A
a)
T
2A
b)
T
4 A
c)
T
2 A
d)
T
26a A simple harmonic oscillator has time period T. The time Since motion starts from extreme position, so
taken by it to travel from extreme position to half the X = a cos(ωt)
amplitude a
 = a cos(ωt)
T 2
a)
6 1
 cos(ωt) =
T 2
b)
4 
T
 t =
c) 3
3
T 2 t 
d)  =
2 T 3
T
 t=
6
27b Springs of constants k, 2k, 4k, 8k, …., 2048k are 1 1 1 1 1
connected in series. A mass m is attached to one end and = + + + + ....
k S k 2 k 4 k 8k
the system is allowed to oscillate. The time period is
1 1 1 1 1 
approximately  = 1 + + + + .... 
m kS k  2 4 8 
a) 2 1 1 1 
2k  =  
2m kS k  1 − 1/ 2 
b) 2 1 2
k  =
kS k
m
c) 2 k
4k  kS =
2
4m
d) 2 m
k  T = 2π
kS
2m
 T = 2π
k
28b A loaded spring vibrates with a period T. The spring is On dividing a spring into four equal parts each
divided into four equal parts and the same load is divided part has a force constant = 4k.
suspended from one of these parts. The new time period m T
is  T’ = 2π =
4k 2
T
a)
4
T
b)
2
c) 2T
d) 4T
29c Two linear simple harmonic motions of equal amplitudes Let x = a cos(ωt)
a and frequencies ω and 2ω are impressed on a particle  
along x and y axis respectively. If the initial phase  y = a cos  2t + 
2  
 
difference between them is , the resultant trajectory y = - a sin(2ωt)
2  y = - 2a sin(ωt)cos(ωt)
equation of the particle is
a) a2y2 = x2(a2 – x2) x2 x
 y = - 2a 1 −
b) a2y2 = 2x2(a2 – x2) a2 a
c) a2y2 = 4x2(a2 – x2)  a2y2 = 4x2(a2 – x2)
d) a2y2 = 8x2(a2 – x2)
30c The bob of a simple pendulum of period T is given a Conceptual
negative charge. If it is allowed to oscillate above a
positively charged plate, the new time period will be
a) Equal to T
b) More than T
c) Less than T
d) Infinite
PROPERTIES OF MATTER
11 -2 -3
1a Young’s modulus of steel in is 2 x 10 Nm . A steel wire Strain = 10
has a length of 1 m and area of cross section 1 mm2. The 1
work required to increase its length by 1 mm is Work done = (Tension)(Extension)
2
a) 0.1 J 1
b) 1 J  W = FX
c) 10 J 2
d) 100 J 1  YAx 
 W=  x
2 L 
1 (2 x1011 )(10−6 )(10−6 )
 W=
2 (1)
 W = 0.1 J
2c Bulk modulus of water is 2 x 109 Nm-2. The change in M
pressure required to increase the density of water by =
V
0.1% is  V
a) 2 x 109 Nm-2  =−
b) 2 x 108 Nm-2  V
c) 2 x 106 Nm-2 V
 = −0.1%
d) 2 x 104 Nm-2 V
Since
P
B= − =
 V 
 
 V 
 0.1 
 P = (2 x109 )  
 100 
 P = 2 x106 Nm−2
3b A rubber cord of length L is suspended vertically. Density Stress
of rubber is D and Young’s modulus is Y. If the cord Y = Strain
extends by a length l under its own weight, then ALDg
L2 Dg Stress = = LDg
a) l = A
Y AL
2
L Dg Strain = =
b) l = Leff ( L / 2)
2Y
LDg
2
L Dg  Y=
c) l = (2 / L)
4Y
L2 Dg
L2 Dg  =
d) l = 2Y
8Y
4b If Young’s modulus of iron is 2 x 1011 Nm-2 and the Interatomic force constant = Yr0 = 60 Nm-1
interatomic spacing between two molecules is 3 x 10-10 m,
the interatomic force constant is
a) 30 Nm-1
b) 60 Nm-1
c) 120 Nm-1
d) 240 Nm-1
5c For a given material the Young’s modulus is 2.4 times the Since, Y = 2η(1 + σ)
modulus of rigidity. Its Poisson’s ratio is  2.4 η = 2η(1 + σ)
a) 0.1  σ = 0.2
b) 0.15
c) 0.2
d) 0.4
6a A material has Poisson’s ratio 0.20. If a uniform rod of it V L
suffers a longitudinal strain of 2 x 10-3, then the = (1 − 2 )
V L
percentage change in volume is V
a) + 0.12  = (1 – 0.4)2 x 10-3
b) - 0.12 V
V
c) + 0.28  = 1.2 x 10-3
d) - 0.28 V
 Percentage value = 0.12
7c A cube of side 10 cm is subjected to a tangential force of F
5 x 105 N at the upper face, keeping lower face fixed and  = A
the upper face is displaced by 0.001 rad relative to lower
5 x105
face along the direction of tangential force. Then shear  = 2
modulus of the material of the cube is  10 
a) 5 x 106 Nm-2   0.001
 100 
b) 5 x 108 Nm-2  η = 5 x 1010 Nm-2
c) 5 x 1010 Nm-2
d) 5 x 1011 Nm-2
8b The length of a rubber cord is L1 metres when the tension Let L0 be the unstretched length and L3 be the length
4 N and L2 metres when the tension is 5 N. The length in under a tension of 9 N.
metres when the tension is 9 N is 4 L0 5 L0 9 L0
a) 5L1 – 4L2  Y= = =
A( L1 − L0 ) A( L2 − L0 ) A( L3 − L0 )
b) 5L2 – 4L1
From above
c) 9L1 – 8L2
4 L0 5 L0
d) 9L2 – 8L1 =
A( L1 − L0 ) A( L2 − L0 )
Gives
L0 = 5L1 – 4L2 …(1)
Also, we have
4 9
=
( L1 − L0 ) ( L3 − L0 )

4L3 – 4L0 = 9L1 – 9L0

4L3 = 9L1 – 5L0

4L3 = 9L1 – 25L1 + 20L2

L3 = 5L2 – 4L1
9b A copper wire and a steel wire of the same diameter and Conceptual
length are connected end to end. A force is applied which
stretches their combined length by 1 cm. Then the two
wires have
a) The same stress and strain
b) The same stress but different strains
c) The same strain but different stresses
d) Different stresses and strains
10a The compressibility of water is 5 x 10-5 per unit Compressibility of 5 x 10-5 per unit atmospheric
atmospheric pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cm3
of water under a pressure of 100 atmosphere will be 5 x10−5
a) 0.5 cm3 pressure equals
105
b) 5 x 10-5 cm3
 K = 5 x 10-10 N-1m2
c) 0.025 cm3
1 1
d) 0.005 cm3  B= = x1010 Nm−2
K 5
By definition
V P
V =
B
(100)(100 x105 )
 V =
1
x1010
5
 V = 0.5 cm3
11a If the work done in stretching a wire by 1 mm is 2 J, the 1
work necessary for stretching another wire of the same W = (Tension)(Extension)
2
material but double the radius and half the length by 1 1
mm is  W = FX
a) 16 J 2
W1 F1
b) 8 J  =
c) 4 J W2 F2
1 W1 YA1 x / L1
d) J  =
4 W2 YA2 x / L2
W1 A1 L2
 =
W2 A2 L2
 W2 = (4)(2)(2)
 W2 = 16 J
12b Which of the following relations is true? Conceptual
a) 3Y = K(1 – σ)
Y 
b)  =   −1
 2 
9Y
c) K=
Y +
d) σ = (6K + η)Y
13a A metal beam supported at the two ends is loaded at the Conceptual
centre. If Y is the Young’s modulus, then the depression
at the centre is proportional to
1
a)
Y
b) Y
1
c)
Y2
d) Y2
14a The following four wires are made of the same material. For wires of same material, we have
Which of these will have the largest extension when the F
same tension is applied on all? = constant
Ax
a) Length = 50 cm, diameter = 0.5 mm For same tension applied on all, we have
b) Length = 100 cm, diameter = 1 mm
c) Length = 200 cm, diameter = 2 mm
d) Length = 300 cm, diameter = 3 mm x
A
 x
d2
Extension produced x is maximum for dimensions
given in option A.
15d The extension produced in a wire by the application of a
load is 3.0 mm. The extension in a wire of the same x
d2
material and length but half the radius, by the same load,
is  x
a) 0.75 mm r2
b) 1.5 mm x2 r12
 =
c) 6.0 mm x1 r22
d) 12.0 mm 1
 x2 = (3) 2
1
 
2
 x2 = 3 x 4 = 12 mm
16d Which of the following is most elastic? Steel is more elastic than rubber because for the
a) Rubber same force applied on both, extension produced in a
b) Wet clay steel wire is small as compared to extension
c) Plastic produced in rubber wire. Since
d) Steel 1
Y
x
 YS  YR
Hence, steel is having more Y and so it is more elastic.
17b A steel rod of length l, area of cross-section A, Young’s 1
modulus Y and coefficient of linear expansion α is heated Since, W = 2 (Tension)(Extension)
through t 0C. The work that can be performed by a rod Further
when heated is T = YAαt and
a) (YAαt)(lαt)  = t
1 1
b) (YAαt)(lαt)  W= (YAαt)(lαt)
2 2
1 1 
c) (YAαt)  l t 
2 2 
d) 2(YAαt)(lαt)
18c A wire can support a load W without breaking. It is cut Breaking stress depends upon the area of cross-
into two equal parts. The maximum load that each part section and not on the length
can support is
W
a)
4
W
b)
2
c) W
d) 2W
19d A material has Poisson’s ratio 0.5. If a uniform rod of it When value of Poisson’s ratio is 0.5, then ΔV = 0
suffers a longitudinal strain of 2 x 10-3, the percentage (always). Otherwire, this can be shown as follows.
increase in its volume is
V  ( r L )
a) 1 2
b) 1.5 =
c) 0.5 V  r2L
d) 0 V L 2r
 = +
V L r
Since,
r / r
 =−
L / L
r  L 
 = −  
r  L 
V L
 = (1 − 2 )
V L
For σ = 0.5
V
=0
V
20a A metal wire is stretched by suspending weight to it. If X 1
is the longitudinal strain and Y is the Young’s modulus of U= (Stress)(Strain)
2
elasticity, then the elastic potential energy per unit 1
volume is  U = (YX)X
2
1
a) YX 2 YX 2
2  U=
2
X2
b)
2Y
Y2
c)
2X
X2
d)
2Y 2
21a If a bar is made of copper whose coefficient of linear F = YAαΔT
expansion is one and a half times that of iron, the ratio of F1 1 3
the force developed in the copper bar to the iron bar of  = =
F2  2 2
identical lengths and cross-sections, when heated
through the same temperature range (Young’s modulus
for copper may be taken to be equal to that of iron) is
3
a)
2
2
b)
3
9
c)
4
4
d)
9
22d A steel wire of length 20 cm and uniform cross-section 1  L 
mm2 is tied rigidly at both the ends. The temperature of F = YA  L 
 
the wire is altered from 40 0C to 20 0C. What is the
 L 
magnitude of force developed in the wire? (Coefficient of  F = YAαΔT  =  T 
linear expansion for steel, α = 1.1 x 10-5 0C-1 and Y for  L 
steel is 2.0 x 1011 Nm-2)  F = (2 x 1011)(10-6)(1.1 x 10-5)(20)
a) 2.2 x 106 N  F = 44 N
b) 16 N
c) 8 N
d) 44 N
23a Two wires of copper have lengths in the ratio 1 : 2 and Young’s Modulus is the property of the material and
radii in the ratio 2 : 1. Their Young’s moduli are in the changes only with the change in material but is
ratio independent of the dimensions.
a) 1 : 1
b) 1 : 8
c) 8 : 1
d) 1 : 4
24b A solid sphere of radius R made of material of Bulk By definition, Bulk’s modulus given by
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical dP
container. A massless piston of area A floats on the K=
 dV 
surface of the liquid when a mass m is placed on the  
piston to compress the liquid, the fractional change in the
 V 
mg / A
radius of the sphere,
dR
is  K=
R  dV 
 
mg  V 
a)
dV mg
4 AK  =
mg V AK
b) For a sphere
3 AK
mg 4 3
c) V= R
2 AK 3
4
d)
mg  dV = d(R3)
AK 3
4
 dV = (3R2dR)
3
dV  dR 
 = 3 
V  R 
 dR  mg
 3 =
 R  AK
dR mg
 =
R 3 AK
25a The modulus of rigidity of a liquid is Conceptual
a) 0
b) 1
c) 
d) None of these
26c The Young’s modulus for a perfectly rigid body is Conceptual
a) 0
b) 1
c) 
d) None of these
27c Two rods of different materials having coefficients of Thermal Stress = YαΔT
linear expansions α1, α2 and Young’s moduli Y1, Y2  Y1α1ΔT = Y2α2ΔT
respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls.
The rods are heated such that they undergo the same Y1  2 3
increase in temperature. There is no bending of the rods.  =
Y2 1 2
=
If α1 : α2 = 2 : 3, the thermal stresses developed in the
two rods are equal provided Y1 : Y2 is equal to
a) 2 : 3
b) 1 : 1
c) 3 : 2
d) 4 : 9
28d When an elastic material with Young’s modulus Y is Elastic Energy stored per unit volume is also called
subjected to a stretching stress X, the elastic energy Elastic Energy Density (U)
stored per unit volume is 1
 U = (Stress)(Strain)
2X 2
a)
Y 1 X  Stress 
 U= (X )   Y= 
Y2 2 Y   Strain 
b)
2X X 2
X 2Y  U=
c) 2Y
2
X2
d)
2Y
29b One end of a long metallic wire of length L is tied to a Conceptual
ceiling. The other end is tied to a massless spring of
spring constant K. A mass M hangs from the free end of
the spring. The area of cross-section and the Young’s
modulus of the wire are A and Y respectively. If the mass
is slightly pushed down and released, it will oscillate with
a time period T equal to
M
a) 2
K
(YA + KL) M
b) 2
YAK
MYA
c) 2
KL
ML
d) 2
AY
30c Two wires A and B, made of the same material, have FL
equal lengths and radii in the ratio 1 : 2. Same load is Y = Ax
hung from both of them. If the strain in A is 0.04, that in B F
is Strain =
a) 0.04 AY
b) 0.02 ( Strain ) A rB2
 =
c) 0.01 ( Strain ) B rA2
d) 0.005
1
 (Strain)B = (0.04)
4
 (Strain)B = 0.01
GRAVITATION & SATELLITES
1a Two planets of radii R1 and R2 are made of the same GM 4
material. The ratio of the acceleration due to gravity at g = R 2 = 3  R  g
the surfaces of the two planets is g1 R1
R1  =
a) g2 R2
R2
R2
b)
R1
2
 R1 
c)  
 R2 
2
 R2 
d)  
 R1 
2d Consider the earth to be a homogenous sphere. Scientist Conceptual
A goes down in a mine and scientist B goes high up in a
balloon. The gravitational field measured by
a) A goes on decreasing and that by B goes on
increasing
b) B goes on decreasing and that by A goes on
increasing
c) Each goes on increasing
d) Each goes on decreasing
3b A particle is projected vertically upwards with a velocity By law of conservation of energy
gR , where R denotes the radius of the earth and g the (U + K)surface = (U + K)h
GMm 1 2 GMm
acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth.  − + mv = − +0
Then the maximum height ascended by the particle is R 2 R+h
R { At maximum height velocity is zero}
a) GMm 1 GMm
2  − + mgR = −
b) R R 2 R+h
c) 2R GMm 1 GMm GMm
 − + =−
5R R 2 R R+h
d)
4  GM 
 g= 2 
 R 
 h=R
4b The orbital speed of Jupiter is GMs
a) Greater than the orbital speed of the earth v0 =
b) Less than the orbital speed of the earth
r
c) Equal to the orbital speed of the earth Orbital speed of all planets depends upon the mass of
d) Zero sum and the separation. So,
1
v0 
r
Since Jupiter is having more orbital radius in
comparison to earth, so orbital speed of Jupiter is less
than that of earth.
5a, d A point P is lying at a distance r(< a) from the centre of The field inside the shell is zero and so potential
shell of radius a. If E and V be the gravitational field and inside the shell is constant equal to the value that
potential at the point P then, GM
a) E = 0 exists at the surface i.e. − .
a
GM
b) E= −
r2
c) V=0
GM
d) V= −
a
6c The period of a satellite moving in a circular orbit near 2 r
the surface of a planet is independent of T=
v0
a) Radius of the planet
Since orbital velocity of a satellite is independent of
b) Mass of the planet
mass of satellite itself. So T is also independent of
c) Mass of the satellite
mass of satellite
7d The mean radius of the earth’s orbit around the sun is 1.5 Conceptual
x 1011 m and that of the orbit of mercury is 6 x 1010 m.
The mercury will revolve around the sun in nearly
2
a)
5
2
b) year
5
2
2
c)   year
5
3/2
2
d)   year
5
8a In PROBLEM 7, the ratio of the orbital velocity of mercury Conceptual
to that of the earth is
10
a)
2
2
b)
10
c) 2 10
1
d) 10
2
9b Two identical thin rings each of radius R are coaxially
placed at a distance R. If the rings have a uniform mass
distribution and each has mass m1 and m2 respectively,
then the work done in moving a mass m from centre of
one ring to that of the other is
a) Zero
Gm(m1 − m2 )( 2 − 1)
b)
2R  Potential at   Potential at 
VA =  + 
Gm 2(m1 + m2 )  A dueto A   A dueto B 
c)
R Gm1 Gm2
 VA = − − and
R 2R
Gmm1 ( 2 + 1) Similarly,
d)  Potential at   Potential at 
m2 R VB =  + 
 B dueto A   B dueto B 
Gm2 Gm1
 VB = − −
R 2R
Since WA→B = m(VB – VA)
Gm(m1 − m2 )( 2 − 1)
 WA→B =
2R
10c The orbital velocity of an artificial satellite in a circular GM
orbit just above the earth’s surface is v. For a satellite v=
orbiting at an altitude of half the earth’s radius, the
R
orbital velocity is GM 2
v' = = v
3 R 3
a) v R+
2 2
3
b) v
2
2
c) v
3
2
d) v
3
11c A body released from a height h takes time t to reach 2h
earth’s surface. The time taken by the same body t=
g
released from the same height to reach the moon’s
surface is 2h
a) t
t'= = 6t
g/6
b) 6t
Because acceleration due to gravity on the moon is
c) 6t one sixth the value at earth.
t
d)
6
12c A geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a
circular orbit of radius 36000 km. Then the time period of v gR = 7.9 kms-1, and
a spy satellite orbiting a few hundred kilometer above the 2 R 2 6400 x1000
earth’s surface (Rearth = 6400 km) will approximately be T =
1
v 7900
a) hour = 84.79 minute
2 Is the time period of satellite revolving very close to
b) 1 hour earth’s surface. So time period of spy satellite must
c) 2 hour be slightly greater and so C is the appropriate answer.
d) 4 hour
13b A body of mass m is taken from the earth’s surface to a Conceptual
height equal to the radius R of the earth. If g is the
acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the earth,
then the change in the potential energy of the body is
mgR
a)
4
mgR
b)
2
c) mgR
d) 2mgR
14d If the distance between two masses is doubled, the Conceptual
gravitational attraction between them
a) Is doubled
b) Becomes four times
c) Is reduced to half
d) Is reduced to a quarter
15d The gravitational force between two particles, each of Conceptual
mass 1 kg, separated by a distance of 1 m in vacuum is
a) Zero
b) 6.67 x 10-5 N
c) 6.67 x 10-8 N
d) 6.67 x 10-11 N
16c The radius of the earth is R and acceleration due to GMm
gravity at its surface is g. If a body of mass m is sent to a U i = −
R
R
height of from the earth’s surface, the potential GMm
4 Uf = −
R
energy increases by R+
mgR 4
a) 1 GMm
3  U = U f − U i =
mgR 5 R
b)
mgR  GM 
4  U =  g= 2 
mgR 5  R 
c)
5
mgR
d)
16
17d In PROBLEM 16, the minimum speed with which the body By Law of Conservation of Energy
must be thrown from the surface of the earth so as to 1 2
R U = mv
reach a height of is 2
4 2
1  v= gR
a) gR 5
2
b) gR
1
c) gR
5
2
d) gR
5
18b The kinetic energy of a satellite in an orbit close to the Orbital velocity close to surface of earth is gR . So,
surface of the earth is E. What should be its kinetic
1
( )
2
energy so that it escapes from the gravitational field of E = m gR
the earth? 2
1
a) 2E  E= mgR
b) 2E 2
c) 2 2E If the body is to escape then velocity at surface of
d) 4E earth is gR . If E’ is the kinetic energy
corresponding to this velocity then
1
( )
2
E’ = m 2 gR
2
 E’ = 2E
13
19b The distance of Neptune and Saturn from the sun are 10 3
TN2  1013 
m and 1012 m respectively. Assuming that they move in = 
circular orbits, their time periods are in the ratio TS2  1012 
a) 10 TN
 = 10 10
b) 10 10 TS
c) 100
d) 1000
20c A satellite is orbiting close to the surface of the earth. In  Ve − V0 
order to make it move to infinity its velocity must be %age increase =   x100
increased by about  V 0 
a) 20%  2 −1 
 %age increase =   x100 = 40%
1 
b) 30%
c) 40% 
d) 60%
21b An infinite number of masses, each of 1 kg, are placed on 1 1 1 1 
the positive x – axis at 1 m, 2 m, 4 m, 8 m, …… from the Eg = G 12 + 22 + 42 + 82 + ...
 
origin. The value of the gravitational field at the origin die
 1 1 1 
to this distribution is  Eg = G 1 + + + + ...
a) 2G  4 16 64 
b)
4G  
3  1 
 Eg = G 
3G 1
c) 1 − 
4  4
d)   For an infinite GP 
 
 1st term 
sum = 1 − Common Ratio 
 
4G
 Eg =
3
22d If R is the radius of the earth, then the height above the g
earth’s surface where the value of g will be half its value g h =
at the earth’s surface, is 2
a) R  1 − 2h 
Here, do remember that the formula gh = g  
b) 2R  R 
must not be applied as this formula is just valid close
c) (2 – 2 )R
to surface of earth. So, the actual formula
d) ( 2 - 1)R 2
gR
gh =
( R + h) 2
Must be used.
g gR 2
 =
2 ( R + h) 2
R+h
 = 2
R
 h= (
2 −1 R )
23a If mean radius of earth is R, its angular velocity is ω, and r 3
the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the earth T 2 = 4 2

GM
is g, then the cube of the radius of the orbit of
r3
geostationary satellite will be  T 2 = 4 2
R2 g  GM  2
a)  2 R
2  R 
R2 g  r3 
b)  T 2 = 4 2  2 
  gR 
R 2 2 4 2 2 r
3

c)  = 4  2
g  2
 gR 
Rg 2
d) gR
2  r3 = 2

24b If the radius of the earth were to shrink by one percent, GM
its mass remaining the same, the value of g on the earth’s g= 2
R
surface would dg dR
a) Increase by 0.5%  = −2
b) Increase by 2% g R
c) Decrease by 0.5% dR
= - 1%
d) Decrease by 2% R
dg
 = 2%
g
25a The angular speed at which the earth would have to 0 = g – Rω2
rotate in order to make the effective acceleration due to g
the gravity at the equator equal to zero is  = = 1.2 x10−3 rads-1
a) 1.2 x 10-3 rads-1 R
b) 2.4 x 10-3 rads-1
c) 1.2 x 10-2 rads-1
d) 2.4 x 10-2 rads-1
26b A particle is placed in a field characterized by a value of  V ˆ V 
gravitational potential given by V = - kxy, where k is a  Eg = −V = −  iˆ +j  = k yiˆ + xjˆ ( )
 x y 
constant. If Eg is the gravitational field then,
The work done by this field is independent of the
a) ( )
Eg = k xiˆ + yjˆ and is conservative in nature path followed between any two states i.e.
W(0, 0)→(a, a) = W(0, 0)→(0, a)→(a, a) = W(0, 0)→(a, 0)→(a, a)
b) Eg = k ( yiˆ + xjˆ ) and is conservative in nature
Since, dW = mEg .dr
c) Eg = k ( xiˆ + yjˆ ) and is non-conservative in ˆ + ˆjdy
Where dr = idx
nature  dW = mk(ydx +xdy)
d) (
Eg = k yiˆ + xjˆ ) and is non-conservative in ( a ,a )
nature
 W=  dW = mk  (0,0)
d ( xy ) = mka 2
 W = mka2 {where m is mass of particle}

So, W(0, 0)→(a, a) = W(0, 0)→(0, a)→(a, a) = W(0, 0)→(a, 0)→(a, a)
= mka2
Hence the field is conservative.
27c If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Conceptual
earth, then the value of acceleration due to gravity at a
R
height equal to from the surface of the earth is (R is
2
the radius of the earth)
g
a)
2
2g
b)
3
4g
c)
9
5g
d)
9
28b Two bodies of masses 103 kg and 105 kg are separated by For gravitational field to be zero
a distance of 2 m. At what distance from the smaller body 103 105
will the intensity of the gravitational field be zero? =
2
x 2
(2 − x)
1
a) m 2− x
11  = 10
2 x
b) m  2 – x = 10x
11 2
1  x= m
c) m 11
9
2
d) m
9
29a The value of g at a particular point is 9.8 ms-2. Suppose
the earth suddenly shrinks uniformly to half its present
size without losing any mass. The value of g at the same
point (distance of the point from the centre of earth does
not change) will now be
a) 9.8 ms-2
If gi is be the initial value for acceleration due to
b) 4.9 ms-2
c) 19.6 ms-2 gravity and gf be the final value, then
d) 39.2 ms -2 GM GM
gi = 2 = g and g f = 2
=g
R R R
 + 
2 2
30a A satellite is revolving round the earth in an orbit of Since, T2 = kr3
radius r with time period T. If the satellite is revolving T r
round the earth in an orbit of radius r + Δr (Δr << r) with  2 = 3
T r
time period T + ΔT (ΔT << T) then, T 3 r
T 3 r  =
a) = T 2 r
T 2 r
T 2 r
b) =
T 3 r
T r
c) =
T r
T r
d) =−
T r
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS & CIRCULAR MOTION

1c A shaft rotating initially at 1725 rpm is brought to rest in Conceptual
20 second. The number of revolutions that the shaft will
make during this interval of time is
a) 1680
b) 840
c) 287
d) 627
2c A solid sphere of mass 2 kg rolls down an inclined plane Since fraction of total energy taken up by the body as
from rest from a height of 7 m. Its rotational kinetic k2
-2
energy on reaching the foot of the plane is (g = 10 ms ) rotational kinetic energy is
R2 + k 2
a) 10 J
1 2
b) 20 J I
2 k2
c) 40 J  = 2
d) 100 J Total Energy R + k 2
1 2  k2 
 I =  2 2 
mgh
2  R +k 
1 2 2  K2 2
 I  = (2 x10 x7)  2
= 
2 7  R 5
1 2
 I  = 40 J
2
3c R Let σ = mass per unit area
A circular plate of radius is cut from one edge of a 2
2 R 3
thin circular plate of radius R. The moment of inertia of  M= R  −     =  R 2
2
2 4
the remaining portion about an axis through O
4
perpendicular to plane of the plate (i.e. about the y-axis)   R 2 = M
is 3
1
Moment of inertia of full plate = M 1 R 2
2
1
I1 = ( R 2 ) R 2
2
Moment of inertia of hole about specified axis 0
2 2
1 R R
I2 = M 2   + M 2  
2 2 2
11 3
a) MR 2  I2 = M 2 R2
24 8
7
3  R  2
2
b) MR 2
12  I 2 =      R
8   2  
c)
13
24
MR 2  I2 =
3
32
(  R 2 ) R 2
1 3 
I = I1 − I 2 =  −  ( R 2 ) R 2
5
d) MR 2 
7  2 32 
 13   4 M  2 13
 I = I1 − I 2 =    R = MR 2
 32   3  24
4a A particle is moved in a circle with a constant angular Since L = Iω
velocity. Its angular momentum is L. If the radius of the  L = (mr2)ω
circle is halved keeping the angular velocity same, the r L
angular momentum of the particle will become When r becomes , L becomes .
2 4
L
a)
4
L
b)
2
c) L
d) 2L
5a, c, d A uniform bar of length 6a and mass 8m lies on a smooth 2m(−v) + m(2v) + 8m(0)
horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m moving in VC = =0 {OPTION (A)}
2m + m + 8m
the same horizontal plane with speeds 2v and v, Further, by law of conservation of Angular
respectively, strike the bar as shown in the figure and Momentum
stick to if after collision. Denoting angular velocity (about
 
the centre of mass), total energy and the centre of mass
velocity by ω, E and VC respectively, we have after
 I system   =
 about O  system
mvr⊥ 
about O
collision
1 
I system =  (8m)(6a) 2 + m(2a) 2 + 2ma 2 
about O 12 
 mvr⊥ = (8m)(0)(0) + 2m(-v)(-a) + m(2v)(2a)
system
about O
 
system
mvr⊥ = lmva
a) VC = 0 about O
3v  (30ma2)ω = 6mva
b) =
5a v
 = {OPTION (C)}
v 5a
c)  =
5a Further total energy of the system E is
3mv 2 1 2 3 2
d) E = E= I  = mv {OPTION (D)}
5 2 5
6a The radius of a wheel is R and its radius of gyration about 1 2
I
its axis passing through its center and perpendicular to its Rotational KE K2
plane is K. If the wheel is rolling without slipping, the ratio = 2 = 2
Translational KE 1 Mv 2 R
of its rotational kinetic energy to its translational energy
2
is
{ I = MK2, v = Rω}
K2
a)
R2
R2
b)
K2
R2
c)
R2 + K 2
K2
d)
R2 + K 2
7a In PROBLEM 6, the ratio of the rotational kinetic energy Conceptual
to total kinetic energy is
K2
a)
R2 + K 2
R2
b)
R2 + K 2
1
c)
R + K2
2
d) None of these
8b In PROBLEM 6, the ratio of the translational kinetic Conceptual
energy to the total kinetic energy is
K2
a)
R2 + K 2
R2
b)
R2 + K 2
1
c)
R + K2
2
d) None of these
9b, d A particle of mass m is projected with velocity v making L = mvxh
an angle of 450 with the horizontal. The magnitude of  v 2 sin 2 45 
angular momentum of the projectile about point of  L = m(v cos 45)  
projection when the particle is at maximum height h is  2g 
a) Zero mv 3
 v 2 sin 2 45 
mv 3  L=  h 
b) 4 2g  2g 
4 2g
v2
mv 3 Also from h =
c) 4g
2g
 v=2 gh
3
d) m 2 gh mv
 L= h gives
2
m2 ghh
L=
2
 L = m 2 gh3
10d A solid cylinder of mass M and radius R rolls from rest Conceptual
down a plane inclined at an angle θ to the horizontal. The
velocity of the centre of mass of the cylinder after it has
rolled down a distance d is
2
a) gd tan 
3
b) gd tan 
3
c) gd sin 
4
4
d) gd sin 
3
11c The rotational kinetic energy of the body is E and the Conceptual
moment of inertia is I. The angular momentum of the
body is
a) EI
b) 2 EI
c) 2EI
E
d)
I
12c A motor car of mass m travels with a uniform speed v on mv 2
a circular bridge of radius r. When the car is at the highest N+ = mg
r
point of the bridge, then the force exerted by the car on
the bridge is
a) mg
mv 2
b) mg +
r
mv 2
c) mg −
r mv 2
2  N = mg −
mv r
d)
r
13a A solid sphere and a spherical shell roll down an inclined Conceptual
place from rest from same height. The ratio of the times
taken by them is
21
a)
25
21
b)
25
25
c)
21
25
d)
21
14a A mass m slides, from rest, down the surface of a 1 2
frictionless hemispherical bowl of radius r from the mgr = mv
highest point A (see figure). The velocity of the mass
2
when it reaches the bottom is  v= 2gr
a) 2gr
b) mgr
c) 2mgr
d) gr
15a A particle of mass m is tied to a light string and rotated The actual forces acting on the particle are mg and T
with a speed v along a circular path of radius r. If T is mv 2
tension in the string and mg is gravitational force on the only.
r is the centrifugal force which is fictitious
particle then the actual forces acting on the particle are
a) mg and T only
mv 2
b) mg, T and an additional force on directed
r
inwards
mv 2
c) mg, T and an additional force of directed
r
outwards
mv 2
d) Only a force directed outwards
r
16b A thin uniform, circular disc is rolling down an incline g sin 
plane of inclination 300 without slipping. Its linear a=
K2
acceleration along the plane is 1+ 2
R
g
a) g sin 30 g
4  a= =
1 3
g 1+
b) 2
3
g
c)
2
2g
d)
3
17d A solid cylinder R is free to rotate about its axis which is g
horizontal. A string is wound around it and a mass m is a = M
attached to its free end. When m falls through a distance 1+
2m
h, its speed at that instant is proportional to so, v2 = 2ah
a) R  v is independent of R
1
b)
R
1
c)
R2
d) None of these
18a Two masses m and M are connected by a light string that Mg = mlω2
passes through a smooth hole O at the centre of a table.
Mass m lies on the table and M hangs vertically, m is 1 Mg
moved round in a horizontal circle with O as the centre. If  f=
l is the length of the string from O to m then the 2 m
frequency with which m should revolve so that remains
stationary is
1 Mg
a)
2 ml
1 Mg
b)
 ml
1 Ml
c)
2 mg
1 Ml
d)
 mg
19d The ratio of the time taken by a solid sphere and that 2  1 2
taken by a disc of the same mass and radius to roll down t =  = at 
a smooth inclined plane from rest from the same height
a  2 
a) 15 : 14 g sin 
Where a =
b) 15 : 14 K2
1+ 2
c) 14 : 15 R
5
d) 14 : 15 asphere = g sin 
7
2
adisc = g sin 
3
tsphere adisc 14
 = =
tdisc asphere 15
20b A cord is wound round the circumference of wheel of g
radius r. The axis of the wheel is horizontal and moment a =  I 
of inertia about its axis is I. A weight mg is attached to the 1 + 2 
end of the cord and is allowed to fall from rest. The
 mr 
2 2
angular velocity of the wheel, when the weight has fallen since v 2– u = 2as
through a distance h, is  v = 2ah
2(mgr 2 )h
2 gh  v2 =
a) 1 + mr 2
1 + mr
2mgh
2mgh  v=
b) I + mr 2
1 + mr 2
v 2mgh
2mgh  = =
c) r I + mr 2
1 + 2mr 2
d) 2gh
21a A particle P with a mass 2.0 kg has position vector r = 3.0 L = mvr sin θ
m and velocity V = 4.0 ms-1 shown. It is accelerated by the  L = (2)(4)(3) sin 30
force F = 2.0 N. All three vectors lie in the common plane.  L = 12 kg ms-2
The angular momentum vector is Direction is found by Right Hand Thumb Rule
a) 12 kgm2s-1 out of the plane of the figure

b) 12 kgm2s-1 into the plane of the figure
c) Zero
d) 24 kgm2s-1 out of the plane of the figure
22b In PROBLEM 21, the torque is  = Fr sin θ
a) 6 Nm out of the page 1
b) 3 Nm out of the page   = (2)(3)  
 
2
c) 6 Nm into the page
  = 3 Nm
d) 3 Nm into the page
Direction is found by Right Hand Thumb Rule
23c The moment of inertia of a thin uniform circular disc 1
about one of its diameters is l. The moment of inertia I= MR 2
4
about an axis perpendicular to the circular surface and 1
passing through its centre is I ' = MR 2 = 2 I
2
I
a)
2
I
b)
2
c) 2I
d) 2I
24a, c The density of a rod AB increases linearly from A to B. Its The farther the mass is distributed from the Axis of
midpoint is O and its centre of mass is at C. Four axes Rotation (AOR), the more the Moment of Inertia.
pass through A, B, O and C, all perpendicular to the length
of the rod. The moments of inertia of the rod about these
axes are IA, IB, IO and IC respectively Here C must be towards heavier side and hence lies
a) IA > IB between O and B.
b) IA < IB  IA > IO > IC > IB
c) IO > IC
d) IO < IC
25b An equilibrium triangle ABC formed from a uniform wire No external torque is acting on the system, so angular
has two small identical beads initially located at A. The momentum is conserved. Further there exists no non-
triangle is set rotating about the vertical axis AO. Then conservative forces in the system, so total energy is
the beads are released from rest simultaneously and also conserved.
allowed to slide down, one along AB and the other along
AC as shown. Neglecting frictional effects, the quantities
that are conserved as beads slide down are
a) Angular velocity and total energy (kinetic and

potential)
b) Total angular momentum and total energy
c) Angular velocity and moment of inertia about
the axis of rotation
d) Total angular momentum and moment of inertia
about the axis of rotation
26b A uniform disc of mass M = 2.50 kg and radius R = 0.20 m Conceptual
is mounted on an axle supported on fixed frictionless
bearings. A light cord wrapped around the rim is pulled
with a force 5 N. on the same system of pulley and string
instead of pulling it down, a body of weight 5 N is
suspended. If the first process is termed A and the second
B, the tangential acceleration will be
a) Equal in the processes A and B

b) Greater in process A than in B
c) Greater in process B than in A
d) Independent of the two processes
27b Refer to PROBLEM 26, where a disc of mass M and radius Conceptual
R is once pulled by a force 5 N by means of a string, and is
then tied with a mass whose weight is 5 N. If the two
processes are termed A and B respectively, then
a) Mechanical energy is conserved in both A and B
b) Mechanical energy is conserved in B only
c) Mechanical energy is conserved in A only
d) Mechanical energy is conserved neither in A nor
in B
28c A force F = aiˆ + 3 ˆj + 6kˆ is acting at a point For Angular Momentum to be conserved  ext = 0
r = 2iˆ − 6 ˆj − 12kˆ . The value of a for which angular 
a 3
= =
6
momentum is conserved is 2 −6 −12
a) 0  a=-1
b) 1
c) -1
d) 2
29c Three point masses of 1 g, 2 g and 3 g have their centre of Since centre of mass of 1 g, 2 g and 3 g is at (2, 2, 2)
mass at (2, 2, 2). A fourth mass of 4 g is placed at position  a mass of (1 + 2 + 3)g = 6 g is placed at (2, 2, 2).
vector r such that the centre of mass of new system is Let the new mass of 4 g be placed at r , such that
now at (0, 0, 0) the new centre of mass is new at origin (0, 0, 0).
a) r = (-1, -1, -1) Hence
b) r = (-2, -2, -2) 6(2, 2, 2) + 4r
c) r = (-3, -3, -3) (0, 0, 0) =
10
d) r = (-4, -4, -4)
 r = (-3, -3, -3)
30b A thin rod of mass m and length 2l is made to rotate Since  = I
about an axis passing through its centre and
 m(2 ) 2    
perpendicular to it. If its angular velocity changes from 0   =  
to ω in time t, the torque acting on it is  12   t 
ml 2 m 2
a)  =
12t 3t
ml 2
b)
3t
ml 2
c)
t
4ml 2
d)
3t
WORK, ENERGY, POWER & COLLISIONS

1b A man pulls a bucket of water from a depth of h from a h
well. If the mass of the rope and that of bucket full of The centre of mass of the rope is at a height 2 . So,
water are m and M respectively, the work done by the total work done is the sum of work done to pull the
man is bucket of mass M to a height h and the work done to
a) (M + m)gh h
 m pull the CM of the rope of mass m to a height . So,
b)  M +  gh 2
 2 h
W = Mgh + mg
M +m 2
c)   gh
 2   m
 W = M +  gh
M   2
d)  + m  gh
 2 
2c A body of mass 2 kg makes an elastic collision with u  2 − m 
another body at rest and then continues to move in the 4 =  2 + m  u
 
original direction with one-fourth of its initial speed. The
2−m 1
mass of the struck body is  =
a) 0.6 kg 2+m 4
b) 1 kg  8 – 4m = 2 + m
c) 1.2 kg  5m = 6
d) 2 kg  m = 1.2 kg
3a The coefficient of restitution for a perfectly elastic Conceptual
collision is
a) 1
b) 0
c) 
d) - 1
4a If the kinetic energy of a body is increased by 300%, its Let initial kinetic energy be K. Then increase of 300%
momentum will increase by implies it becomes
a) 100% K + 3K = 4K
b) 150% Since, p = 2mK
c) 200%
d) 400%  p K
 p becomes 4 p
 p becomes 2p i.e. an increase of
2p − p
x 100 = 100%
p
5b A bomb of mass 1 kg, initially at rest, explodes into three m 3m
fragments of masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The two pieces 0 = (30 2) + v
5 5
of equal mass fly off perpendicular to each other, each
with a speed of 30 ms-1. What is the velocity of the
 v = - 10 2 ms-1
heavier fragment?
a) 10 2 ms-1 at 450 with each of the other two
fragments
b) 10 2 ms-1 at 1350 with each of the other two
fragments
c) 20 ms-1 at 450 with each of the other two
fragments
d) 20 ms-1 at 1350 with each of the other two
fragments
6c A bullet of mass 0.01 kg, travelling at a speed of 500 ms-1, By law of conservation of Momentum
strikes a block of mass 2 kg, which is suspended by a mu = mv + MV
string of length 5 m, and emerges out. The block rises by Where m = mass of bullet
a vertical distance of 0.1 m. The speed of the bullet after M = mass of block
it emerges from the block is u = velocity of bullet before collision
-1
a) 55 ms v = velocity of bullet after collision
b) 110 ms-1 V = velocity of block after collision
c) 220 ms-1 By law of conservation of energy
d) 440 ms-1 1
Mgh = MV 2
2
 V= 2 x9.8 x0.1
 V = 1.4 ms-1
Put in (1), we get
5 = 0.01v + 2(1.4)
 v = 220 ms-1
7b A 6000 kg rocket is set for vertical firing. If the exhaust dM
speed is 1000 ms-1, the amount of gas that must be M0g = Thrust = v dt
ejected per second to supply the thrust needed to dM M 0 g
overcome the weight of the rocket is (g = 10 ms-2)  =
a) 30 kg dt v
dM 60000
b) 60 kg  = = 60 kgs-1
c) 75 kg dt 1000
d) 90 kg
8d In PROBLEM 7, the amount of gas that must be ejected to F – Mg = Ma
give the rocket an initial upward acceleration of 20 ms-2 is  F = M(g + a)
a) 90 kgs-1  F = (6000)(10 + 20)
b) 120 kgs-1  F = 18 x 104 N
c) 150 kgs-1 Further
d) 180 kgs-1 dM
F= v
dt
dM
 18 x 104 = (1000)
dt
dM
 = 180 kgs-1
dt
9b An electric motor creates a tension of 4500 N in a P = Fv
hoisting cable and reels it in at the rate of 2 ms-1. The  P = (4500)(2) = 9000 W
power of the motor is  P = 9 kW
a) 15 kW
b) 9 kW
c) 225 W
d) 9000 H.P.
10a A crate of mass m falls from a height h onto the end of a By law of conservation of energy
platform, as shown in the figure. The spring is initially 1 2
unstretched and the mass of the platform can be mg(h + x) = 2 kx
neglected. Assuming that there is no loss of energy, the
maximum elongation of the spring is mg + m2 g 2 + 2mghk
 x=
k
mg + m2 g 2 + 2mghk
a)
k
mg − m2 g 2 + 2mghk
b)
k
k
c)
m 2 g 2 + 2mghk
m2 g 2 + 2mghk
d)
k
11c A body of mass 2 kg, initially at rest, is acted upon F 5
simultaneously by two forces, one of 4 N and the other of a = = = 2.5 ms-2
3 N, acting at right angles to each other. The kinetic m 2
energy of the body after 20 s is Velocity at t = 20 s is
a) 500 J v = at
b) 1250 J  v = (2.5)(20) = 50 ms-1
c) 2500 J
d) 5000 J 1
 K.E. = (2)(2500)
2
 K.E. = 2500 J
12c When the velocity of a body is doubled P = mv
a) Its kinetic energy is doubled
b) Its potential energy is doubled
c) Its momentum is doubled
d) Its acceleration is doubled
13a A car is moving on a straight road with a speed V0. If the f = Force of friction = µg
coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road is µ,  mg
the distance travelled by the car before it comes to rest is  Retardation = m =  g
V02 Since v2 – u2 = 2as
a)
2 g  02 − V02 = 2(-µg)s
2
 V0  
V02
b)   s=
 g  2 g
V0
c)
g
V02
d)
g
14c A particle moves with a velocity v = 5iˆ − 3 ˆj + 6kˆ ms-1 Pinst = F .v
under the influence of a constant force  Pinst = 50 – 30 + 120
F = 10iˆ + 10 ˆj + 20kN . The instantaneous power  Pinst = 140 W
ˆ
applied to the particle is
a) 200 Js-1
b) 40 Js-1
c) 140 Js-1
d) 170 Js-1
15a A railway truck of mass 2 x 104 kg, travelling at 0.5 ms-1, (2 x 104)(0.5) – (104)(0.4) = (3 x 104)V
collides with another truck of half its its mass, moving in 0.6
the opposite direction at 0.4 ms-1. If the trucks couple  V= ms-1
3
automatically on collision, their common velocity after  V = 0.2 ms-1
collision is
a) 0.2 ms-1
b) 0.47 ms-1
c) 0.1 ms-1
d) 0.3 ms-1
16c A moving body need not have A moving body will always possess velocity,
a) Velocity momentum and hence kinetic energy. If the body
b) Momentum moves on zero potential energy level, then it may not
c) Potential energy possess potential energy.
d) Kinetic energy
17c A body is gently dropped on a conveyor belt moving at 3 v2
ms-1. If µ = 0.5, how far will the body move relative to the s=
2 g
belt before coming to rest? (g = 10 ms-2)
9
a) 0.3 m  s=
b) 0.6 m 2(0.5)(10)
c) 0.9 m  s = 0.9 m
d) 1.8 m
18d A pump can take out 36000 kg of water per hour from a (36000)(10)(100)
100 m deep well. If the efficiency of the pump is 50%, its P = 3600
power is (g = 10 ms-2) P = 10 kW
a) 5 kW Since Efficiency η = 50%
b) 10 kW 1 Output
c) 15 kW  =
d) 20 kW 2 Input
1 10
 =
2 x
 x = 20 kW
19a A man weighing 60 kg climbs a staircase carrying a 20 kg  400 
load, on his hand. The staircase has 20 steps and each (60 + 20)(10)  
 100 
step has a height of 20 cm. If he takes 20 second to climb, P = { h = 400 cm = 4 m}
his power is 20
a) 160 W
 P = 160 W
b) 230 W
c) 320 W
d) 80 W
20c A running man has half the kinetic energy of a boy of half 1
his mass. The man speeds up by 1.0 ms-1 and then has the (K.E)man = 2 (K.E)boy
same kinetic energy as the boy. The original speed of the
1 1 1  M  2
boy was  Mvm2 =    vb 
a) 2.4 ms-1 2 2 2  2  
-1
b) 9.6 ms v
c) 4.8 ms-1  vm = b …(1)
2
d) 7.2 ms-1 Further,
1 1M 
M (vm + 1) 2 =   vb2
2 2 2 
v
 vm + 1 = b …(2)
2
Solving (1) & (2), we get
vb = 2( 2 + 1) = 4.82 ms-1
vm = 2 + 1 = 2.41 ms-1
21d A bullet of mass m and velocity a is fired into a large block ma = (M + m)V
of wood of mass M. The final velocity of the system is ma
 V=
a)
a
a M +m
m+M
m+M
b) a
m
m+a
c) a
M
m
d) a
m+M
22b, c A bag of mass M hangs by a long thread. A bullet of mass By Law of Conservation of Momentum
m comes horizontally with a velocity v and gets mv = (M + m)V
embedded in the bag. Then for the combined system,  Momentum of combined system is (M + m)V =
immediately after the collision, the mv
mvM 1
a) Momentum is K.E. = (M + m)V2
M +m 2
b) Momentum is mv m2v 2
m2v 2  K.E. =
c) Kinetic energy is 2( M + m)
2( M + m)
mv 2
d) Kinetic energy is
2
23c The potential energy of a particle in a certain field is given For stable equilibrium
a b F=0
by U = 2 − , where a and b are positive constants and
r r dU
 − =0
r is the distance from the centre of the field. The distance dr
of particle in the stable equilibrium position is d
 (ar-2 – br-1) = 0
a dr
a)
b 2a b
a  − + =0
b) − r3 r2
b 2a b
2a  =
c) r3 r2
b 2a
2a  r=
d) − b
b
24a A loaded bus and an unloaded bus are both moving with By Work – Energy Theorem
the same kinetic energy. The mass of the former is twice 1 2
that of the latter. Brakes are applied to both so as to mv = Fs
2
exert equal retarding forces. If S1 and S2 are the distances
covered by the two buses, respectively, before coming to
rest, then
a) S1 = S2
b) 2S1 = S2
c) S1 = 2S2
d) S1 = 4S2
25b A ball of mass m moving with a certain velocity collides 1 (m)(m)
against a stationary ball of mass m. The two balls stick Loss = 2 m + m (u − 0)
2
together during collision. If E be the initial kinetic energy,

1m 
then the loss of kinetic energy in the collision is  Loss =  u 2 
a) E 2 2 
E E
b)  Loss =
2 2
E
c)
3
E
d)
4
26c A ball A of mass 1 kg, moving with a speed of 12 ms-1, p 2 = px2 + p y2
collides obliquely and elastically with another ball B
which was initially at rest. Ball A then moves off at right  p2 + 122 + 52
angles to its initial direction with a speed of 5 ms-1. The  p = 13 kgms-1
momentum of ball B after collision is
a) 5 kgms-1
b) 11 kgms-1
c) 13 kgms-1
d) 17 kgms-1
27d An object, initially at rest, explodes into three fragments.
The momenta of two parts are 2 piˆ and pjˆ where p is a
positive number. The momentum of the third part
1
a) Will be of magnitude 3p inclined at tan-1  
2
with x-axis
b) Will be of magnitude 5 p inclined at tan-1(2)
with x-axis
c) Will be of magnitude 3p inclined at π – tan-1(2)
with x-axis
d) Will be of magnitude 5 p inclined at π – tan-1
1
  with x-axis
2
28a Two particles, each of mass m, moving in opposite Conceptual
directions with equal speeds along the same straight line
strike elastically. If the velocities of the first and the
second particle before collision are denoted by +v , and
−v , respectively, then if there is no change in the line of
motion of the two particles, their velocities after collision
are, respectively,
a) −v and +v
b) +v and −v
c) 0 and 2v
d) 2v and 0
29a A 2 kg block is dropped from a height of 0.4 m on a spring By Law of Conservation of Energy, we have
of force constant k = 1960 Nm-1. The maximum
compression of the spring is  Loss in Gravitational   Gain in Elastic 
a) 0.1 m  = 
b) 0.2 m  Potential Energy   Potential Energy 
c) 0.3 m 1
 mg(h + x) = kx 2
d) 0.4 m 2
Putting values to solve the Quadratric Equation, we
get
x = 0.1 m
30a A uniform rod of length 1 m and mass 100 g is pivoted at Increase in P.E. is the increase in P.E. of C.M.
one end and is hanging vertically. It is displaced through ΔU = mglCM (1 – cos θ)
600 from the vertical. The increase in its potential energy  100   1  1 
is (g = 10 ms-2)  U =   (10)    1 − 
 1000   2  2 
a) 0.25 J
b) 0.5 J
 U = 0.25 J
c) 0.75 J
d) 1.0 J
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION & FRICTION
1d The distance x covered in time t by a body, having initial Conceptual
velocity u and having constant acceleration a is given by x
1 2
= ut + at . This result follows from
2
a) Newton’ First law
b) Newton’s second law
c) Newton’s third law
2a When one walks on the ground, the force of friction Conceptual
exerted by ground on him is in
a) Forward direction
b) Backward direction
c) First forward and then backward
d) Zero
3a A mass m is placed on an inclined plane. If the mass is in µ = tan (angle of repose)
equilibrium, the maximum inclination of the plane with  µ = tan θ
the horizontal would be (where µ is the coefficient of  θ = tan-1(µ)
friction between the mass and surface)
a) tan-1µ

b) tan-1  
2

c) tan-1  
m
d) cos-1µ
4d A man is standing on a weighing machine placed in a lift. W’ = 40(10 + 2)
When stationary, his weight is recorded as 40 kg. If the W’ = 480 N
lift is moved upwards with an acceleration of 2 ms-2, then  W’ = 48 kgwt
the weight recorded in the machine will be (g = 10 ms-2)
a) 32 kg
b) 40 kg
c) 42 kg
d) 48 kg
5b A homogeneous rod of length L is acted upon by two
forces F1 and F2 applied to its ends and directed opposite
to each other. If F2 > F1, then with what force F will the
rod be stretched at the cross-section at a distance l from m1 = 
M M 
 and m2 =   (L − )
the end where F1 is applied?  L   L 
Also
F2 – F = m2a …(1)
F – F1 = m1a …(2)
a)
( F2 − F1 ) l  a=
F2 − F1
…(3)
L M
( F2 − F1 ) l + F  F = F1 + m1a
b) 1 M  F2 − F1 
L  F = F1 +  
c)
( F2 + F1 ) l L  M 
2L
d)
(F 2
2
− F12 ) l  F = F1 + ( F2 − F1 )
L L
6b While launching a rocket of mass 2 x 104 kg from the F – mg = ma
surface of the earth, a force of 5 x 105 N is applied for 20  5 x 105 – (2 x 104)(10) = 2 x 104a
s. The velocity of the rocket after 20 s is (g = 10 ms-2)  a = 15 ms-2
-1
a) 500 ms Since
-1
b) 300 ms V = u + at
c) 200 ms-1  v = (15)(20)
d) 100 ms-1  v = 300 ms-1
7c A body is projected up a 450 rough incline. If the  1 
coefficient of friction is 0.5, then the retardation of the a = g  sin 45 + 2 cos 45 
 
block is
 1 1 
a)
g  a = g + 
2 2  2 2 2
g 3g
b)  a=
2 2 2
3g
c)
2 2
g
d)
2
8b A body of mass 2 kg collides with a wall with a speed of F t = p
100 ms-1 and rebounds with the same speed. If the time  1 
1 F  = 2[100 –(- 100)]
of constant is s, the force exerted on the wall is  50 
50  F = 20,000 N
a) 8 N
b) 2 x 104 N
c) 4 N
d) 104 N
9a A force vector applied on a body is given by
F = 62 + 82 + 102
F = 6iˆ − 8 ˆj + 10kˆ and acquires on acceleration 1 ms-2.
Then the mass of the body is  F = 10 2 N
a) 2 kg
10 F
 m=
b) 2 10 kg a
c) 10 kg  m = 10 2 kg
d) 20 kg
10b A block of mass 5 kg is placed on a rough inclined plane. 3
The inclination of the plane is gradually increased till the Sin θ = 5
block just begins to slide down. The inclination of the Since µ = tan θ
plane is then 3 in 5. The coefficient of friction between 3
the block and the plane is (g = 10 ms-2)  =
4
3
a)
5
3
b)
4
4
c)
5
2
d)
3
11c In PROBLEM 10, the minimum force required to move the Fmin = mg(sin θ+ µ cos θ)
block up the plane at this inclination is  3  3 4 
a) 30 N  Fmin = (5)(10)   + x 
b) 40 N  5  4 5 
c) 60 N 3 4
 Fmin = 50  + 
d) 120 N 5 5 
 Fmin = 60 N
12a A batsman deflects a ball at an angle 900 without Impulse = Change in momentum
changing its initial speed which is equals to 54 kmh-1. The  I = p
impulse imparted to the ball (m = 0.5 kg) is
a) 10.6 Ns  I = m(v2 − v1 )
b) 15 Ns  I = m(54 ˆj − 54iˆ)
c) 5 Ns
 I = m(54 2)
d) 7.5 Ns
 5
 I = 0.5  54 2 x 
 18 
 I = 10.6 Ns
-1
13d A body of mass 1 kg strikes a wall with velocity 8 ms Impulse = Change in momentum
along the normal to the wall and returns with velocity 4 Let us consider the positive direction along 8 ms-1 (or
ms-1. The impulse of the force experienced by the wall is towards the wall), then
a) 4 Ns towards the wall I = (1)(-4 – 8)
b) 4 Ns away from the wall  I = - 12 Ns
c) 12 Ns along the normal towards the wall  12 Ns away from wall
d) 12 Ns along the normal away from the wall
14a A block of mass m, lying on a rough horizontal plane, is
acted on by a horizontal force P and another force Q
inclined at an angle θ to the vertical. The block will
remain in equilibrium, if the coefficient of friction
between the block and the surface is
For equilibrium
P + Q sin θ = µN ….(1)
N = mg + Q cos θ ….(2)
Substituting (2) in (1), we get
P + Q sin  P + Q sin θ = µ(mg + Q cos θ)
a)
mg + Q cos  P + Q sin 
P cos  + Q  µ=
b) mg + Q cos 
mg − Q sin 
P + Q sin 
c)
mg + Q sin 
P sin Q − 
d)
mg − Q cos 
15b A large block of wood of mass 40 kg is dragged along the flim = µmg = 200 N = 20 kgf
platform of a railway station with 30 kgf force. The
coefficient of friction between wood and concrete of
platform is 0.5. The force of friction is
a) 30 kgf
b) 20 kgf
c) 10 kgf
d) Zero
16b The mechanical advantage of a system of pulleys is four. Load
The force needed to lift a mass of 100 kg will be M.A. =
Effort
a) 20 kgwt
100 kgwt
b) 25 kgwt  4=
c) 5 kgwt Effort
d) 15 kgwt  Effort = 25 kgwt
17b A satellite in force-free space sweeps stationary  dM 
dM Thrust = −v  
interplanetary dust at a rate = av , where M is the  dt 
dt  Thrust = -v(αv)
mass and v is the velocity of the satellite and α is a
Thrust − v 2
constant. The deceleration of the satellite is  Retardation = =
Mass M
−2 v 2
a)
M
− v 2
b)
M
− v 2
c)
2M
d) -av2
18b A rough vertical board has an acceleration a along the N = ma …(1)
horizontal so that a block of mass M pressing against it f = µN
does not fall. The coefficient of friction between the block For block not to fall
and the board is f≥W
 µma ≥ mg
g
 µ
a
g
a)
a
g
b) 
a
g
c) 
a
a
d) 
g
19b In a tug-of-war contest, two men pull on a horizontal Conceptual
rope from opposite sides. The winner will be the man
who
a) Exerts greater force on the rope
b) Exerts greater force on the ground
c) Exerts a force on the rope which is greater than
the tension in the rope
d) Makes a smaller angle with the vertical
20a A block of mass 2 kg rests on a rough inclined plane For equilibrium f = mg sin θ = (2)(9.8)sin 30
making an angle of 300 with the horizontal. The  f = 9.8 N
coefficient of static friction between the block and the Here we have not used the formula f = µmg cos θ as
plane is 0.7. The frictional force on the block is we are provided with coefficient of static friction
a) 9.8 N which may or may not be the limiting value of static
b) 0.7 x 9.8 N friction.
c) 9.8 x 3N
d) 0.7 x 9.8 x 3 N
21a The magnitude of the force in newton acting on a body Impulse equals the area under the F – t graph.
varies with time t (in micro-second) as is shown in figure.
AB, BC and CD are straight line segments. The magnitude
of total impulse of the force on the body from t = 4 µs
and t = 16 µs is
a) 5 x 10-3 Ns
b) 5000 Ns
c) 5 Ns
1
d) Ns
500
22b How much force is required to push a 100 N wooden F – w sin θ = ma
block up a frictionless plane that is inclined at an angle of F = (100)sin 30 + (10)(2.5)
300 with the horizontal so that it has an acceleration F = 50 + 25 = 75 N
along the plane of 2.5 ms-2? The force is to be applied
along the plane. (g = 10 ms-2)
a) 50 N
b) 75 N
c) 100 N
d) 125 N
23c An aeroplane requires for take-off a speed of 80 kmh-1, v2 – u2 = 2as
the run on the ground being 100 m. The mass of the 2
 5
plane is 10,000 kg and the coefficient of friction between   80 x  = 2a(100)
the plane and the ground is 0.2. Assuming that the plane  18 
accelerates uniformly during the take-off, the minimum  a = 2.47 ms-2
force required by the engine for take-off is For plane to move with acceleration a, we have
a) 2 x 104 N Fapplied – f = ma
b) 2.43 x 104 N  Fapplied - µg = ma
c) 4.43 x 104 N  Fapplied = m(µg + a)
d) 8.86 x 104 N  Fapplied = 10000 (0.2(10) + 2.47)
 Fapplied = 4.47 x 104 N
24c A spring of force constant k is cut into three pieces. The When a spring is cut then
force constant of each part is k = k1 1 = k2 2 = ....
a) k
2k  k = k1
b) 3
3  k1 = 3k
c) 3k
k
d)
3
25c A cricket ball of mass 150 g is moving with a velocity of 12 Since
ms-1 and is hit by a bat so that it is turned back with a FΔt = Δp
velocity of 20 ms-1. The force of blow acts for 0.01 s. The 150
average force exerted by the bat on the ball is  F(0.01) = (12 – (- 20))
1000
a) 120 N  F = 480 N
b) 240 N
c) 480 N
d) 960 N
26b A bird is sitting in a large closed cage which is placed on a Since the cage is closed, so the action and reaction
spring balance. It records a weight of 25 N. The bird of pair cancel each other to give the same reading.
mass 0.5 kg files upward in the cage with an acceleration
of 2 ms-2. The spring balance will now record a weight of
a) 24 N
b) 25 N
c) 26 N
d) 27 N
27a Two blocks A and B are arranged as shown in the figure. mBg = µ(mAg)
The pulley is frictionless. The mass of A is 10 kg. The  mB = (0.2)(10)
coefficient of friction of A with the horizontal surface is  mB = 2 kg
0.2. The minimum mass of B to start the motion will be
a) 2 kg
b) 0.2 kg
c) 5 kg
d) 10 kg
28d In the system shown in figure, the acceleration of the 1 kg Let a be acceleration of 1 kg mass upward, then
mass is a
acceleration of 4 kg mass downwards is .
2
Let T1 be the tension in string connecting 1 kg and
rigid support and T2 be tension in the string
connecting 4 kg to pulley. So,
T2 = 2T1
For 1 kg
T1 – 1g = 1a ….(1)
For 4 kg
a)
g
downward a
4g – T2 = 4  
4 2
b)
g
upward  4g – 2T1= 2a
4  2g – T1 = a ….(2)
g Adding (1) and (2), we get
c) downward 2a = g
2
g
d)
g
upward  a=
2 2
29b A particle of mass m moving with velocity u makes an Change in momentum = Impulse and
elastic one-dimensional collision with a stationary particle Impulse = Area under F – t graph
of mass m. They are in contact for a very brief time T. 1
Their force of interaction increases from zero to F0  mu = (T)(F0)
2
1 2mu
linearly in time T , and decreases linearly to zero in  F0 =
2 T
1
further time T . The magnitude of F0 is
2
mu
a)
T
2mu
b)
T
mu
c)
2T
d) None of these
30d Two boxes, one of mass 20 kg and the other of mass 40 g -2
kg, are sliding down a frictionless inclined plane that a1 = g sin 30 = 2 = 4.9 ms
makes an angle of 300 with the horizontal. Their g
respective accelerations in ms-2 are and a2 = g sin 30 = = 4.9 ms-2
a) 9.8 : 9.8 2
b) 4.9 : 9.8
 a1 : a2 = 4.9 : 4.9
c) 9.8 : 4.9
d) 4.9 : 4.9
DESCRIPTION OF MOTION IN TWO & THREE DIMENSIONS

1a The path of one projectile as seen by an observer on Since both projectiles are moving under the influence
another projectile is a/an of gravity. So, relative acceleration of one projectile a
a) Straight line seen from other is zero. So,
b) Parabole a=0
c) Ellipse
d) Circle
 axiˆ + a y ˆj = 0
So,
ax = 0 ay = 0
dvx dv y
 =0  =0
dt dt
 vx = constant = k1(say)
 vy = constant = k2(say)
dx dy
 = k1  = k2
dt dy
 dx = k1dt  dy = k2dt
x t y t
  dx = k1  dt
0 0
  dy = k  dt 2
0 0
 x = k1t …(1) y = k2t …(2)
Divide (2) by (1), we get y = kx which is the equation
of a straight line.
2a A particle is projected with a velocity v, so that its range R = 2H

on a horizontal plane is twice the greatest height 2v 2 sin  cos   v 2 sin 2  
attained. Then its range is  = 2  
g  2g 
4v 2
a)  tan θ = 2
5g
2 2  2  1  4v 2
 =
g  5 
4g R= v
b)
5v 2
 5  5 g
4v
c)
5g
2v 2
d)
5g
3c A body is projected with a velocity v1 from a point A For bodues to collide, they must reach the maximum
making an angle of 300 with the horizontal. At the same height at the same time. So,
time another body is projected vertically upwards with a v1 sin 30 v2
velocity v2 from the point B. The point B lies vertically =
g g
below the highest point. For both the bodies to collide
v2 1
v2  =
is v1 2
v1
a) 2
b) 0.866
c) 0.5
d) 1
4a A boy throws a ball with a velocity u at an angle θ with The boy should also run with a velocity equal to the
the horizontal. At the same instant he starts running with horizontal velocity of the body projected i.e. u cos θ
uniform velocity to catch the ball before it hits the
ground. To achieve this he should run with a velocity of
a) u cos θ
b) u sin θ
c) u tan θ
d) u tan 
2
5c A football is kicked in parabolic path. Which of the Conceptual

following statements is false?
a) The angle between acceleration and velocity is
changing continuously
b) At some stage acceleration is perpendicular to
velocity
c) At some stage acceleration is parallel to velocity
d) Velocity cannot be zero at some stage
6b For a given angle of projection if the maximum height Since h  u2
reached by a projectile is increased by 10% the horizontal dh  du 
range will  = 2 
h  u 
a) Remain constant
b) Increase by 10%
du
10% = 2
c) Increase by 20% u
d) Increase by 40% du
 = 5%
u
Also R  u2
dR  du 
 = 2   = 2(5%) = 10%
R  u 
Also, we observe that R and h both are proportional
to u2, so R also gets an increment of 10%
7b If acceleration due to gravity increases by 1%, the 1
horizontal range of projectile R
g
a) Increases by 1%
k
b) Decreases by 1%  R = = kg −1
c) Increases by 2% g
d) Decreases by 2% dR dg
 =−
R g
8a A body of mass m thrown horizontally with velocity v For a horizontal projectile. We have
from the top of the tower of height h touches the ground gx 2
at a distance of 250 m from the foot of the tower. A body Y = 2
. So,
2u
v
of mass 2m thrown with a velocity of from the top of g (250) 2
2 h= …(1)
the tower of height 4h will touch the ground at a distance 2v 2
of similarly,
a) 250 m gx 2
4h = …(2)
b) 500 m 2(v / 2)2
c) 1000 m Dividing (1) & (2), we get
d) 125 m X = 250 m
9b The angle of projection for which the horizontal range R = H
and the maximum height of the projectile are equal is 2u 2 sin  cos  u 2 sin 2 
a) 45 0  =
-1 g 2g
b) θ = tan (4)
c) θ = tan-1(0.25)  tan θ = 4
d) None of these
10c A gun fires two bullets at 600 and 300 with the horizon. u 2 sin 2 60 u 2 sin 2 30
The ratio of the maximum heights for the two bullets is H 1 = and H2 =
2g 2g
a) 1 : 1
2
b) 2 : 1 H1 sin 60 3
 = =
c) 3 : 1 H 2 sin 2 30 1
d) 4 : 1
11b A ball rolls of the top of a stair way with a horizontal gx 2
-1
velocity u ms . If the steps are h m high and b m wide, Since y = …(1)
2u 2
the ball will hit the edge of the nth step, if
When x = nb and y = nh, then
2hu
a) n = 2hu 2
gb 2
n= {put values in (1)}
2
gb 2
2hu
b) n=
gb 2
2hu 2
c) n=
gb
hu 2
d) n= 2
gb
12b An arrow is shot in air. Its range is 60 m and its time of 2u sin  2u y
flight is 3 s. If g = 10 ms-2, then the ux and uy are given as T= =
-1 -1 g g
a) 20 ms , 25 ms
b) 20 ms-1, 15 ms-1 2u y
-1 -1
 3=
c) 25 ms , 20 ms g
d) 15 ms-1, 20 ms-1  uy = 15 ms-1
2
Since R = (ux)(uy)
g
2
 60 = ux(15)
10
 ux = 20 ms-1
13d A body is projected, making an acute with the horizontal.
If θ is the angle between velocity v and the acceleration
due to gravity g, then θ is given by
a) θ = 900
b) θ = 00
c) 900 < θ < 00
d) 00 < θ < 1800
So, we conclude that angle between velocity and

acceleration lies between 00 and 1800, so 00 < θ <
1800.
14b A projectiles time of flight t is related to the horizontal 4u 2 sin 2   2u 2 sin  cos  
2
range by the equation gt = 2R. The angle of projection in g = 2  
degrees is
g2  g 
a) 300  tan θ = 1
b) 45 0  θ = 450
0
c) 60
d) 900
15c The vertical height y and the horizontal distance x along Y = 8t – 5t2
the plane of the projectile thrown in air point of Compare with
projection as origin are given by y = 8t – 5t2 and x = 6t 1
where t is second. The velocity with which the body is Y = (u sin θ)t – gt 2 {with g = 10 ms-2}
2
projected is We get,
a) 8 ms-1
b) 6 ms-1 u sin θ = 8 …(1)
c) 10 ms-1 x = 6t
d) Data insufficient compare with
x = (u cos θ)t, we get
u cos θ = 6 …(2)
squaring (1) & (2) and adding, we get u = 10 ms-1
16b In PROBLEM 15, the angle of projection of this projectile In SOLUTION to PROBLEM 15, divide (1) by (2), we get
is 4
tan θ =
8 3
a) tan −1  
5
4
b) tan −1  
3
5
c) tan −1  
6
3
d) tan −1  
4
17c In PROBLEM 15, the distance of the body from the origin At t = 1 s
after one second is Y = 8 – 5 = 3 m and x = 6
a) 10.69 m So, r = x 2 + y 2 = 9 + 36 = 3 5 = 6.69 m
b) 8.69 m
c) 6.69 m
d) 5.69 m
18d A motor cyclist starts from the bottom of the slope of AB = 160 = Range
angle 450 and travels along the slope to jump and clear If v is velocity at A, then
the valley AB as in figure. The width of the valley is 160 m v 2 sin 90
160 =
and length of slope is 160 2 . The minimum velocity g
with which he should leave bottom at O so that he can  v = 40 ms-1
clear the valley is (nearest to ms-1) When it starts from O and reaches A, then it moves
up the incline under the influence of retardation g sin
g
45 = . If u be velocity at O.
2
For OA
v2 – u2 = 2a(OA)
 −g 
 1600 – u2 = 2   (160 2)
a) 50  2
b) 56  u2 = 1600 + 3200
c) 60  u2 = 4800
d) 70  u = 70 ms-1
19a If for the given angle of projection the time of flight is T becomes 2T, when u becomes 2u. So R becomes 4R.
doubled the horizontal range becomes
a) 4 times
b) 2 times
c) 2 times
d) 1/ 2 times
20c For the given angle of projection, the horizontal range is R becomes 2R, when u becomes 2 u. So T becomes
doubled the time of flight becomes
a) 4 times 2T
b) 2 times
c) 2 times
d) 1/ 2 times
21b A hunter aims at a monkey sitting on a stree at a Deviation suffered by the bullet in time t due to the
considerable distance. At the instant he fires at it, the 1 2
monkey drops. The bullet hit the monkey at a height s presence of gravity is gt which is equal to the
2
below the point where the monkey was sitting and after a distance travelled by the monkey in time t when it
time t. Then the value of s is given by 1 2
a) Zero falls freely. So, s = gt
2
1 2
b) gt
2
c) gt2
1 2
d) gt
4
22d The angular momentum with respect to origin when the L = pr sin θ (in magnitude)
projectile hits a horizontal plane is (m is mass of p = mv, r = R, θ = - α
projectile, R is horizontal range, α is the angle of  L = - mvR sin α
projection)
a) Zero
b) mvR sin α
c) mvR cos α
d) -mvR sin α
23c A body falls from the window of the railway carriage The ball will have an initial velocity along the
moving horizontally with an acceleration a. The path horizontal imparted to it due to horizontal motion of
followed by the body as observed by a person on the train.
ground is a
a) Vertical straight line
b) Straight line inclined with the vertical
c) Parabola
d) Helix
24b A projectile of mass m is thrown with a speed v making
an angle of 450 with the horizontal. The change in
momentum from its departure to its arrival along the
vertical and the horizontal direction respectively are
a) 2mv, 2mv
b) 1.41 mv, zero
c) mv, mv
On arrival, the projectile has the same value of
d) 0.71mv, zero
velocity but below the ground at the same angle (see
figure). As x-component reverses its direction, so we
have p y = 2mvy = 2mv sin 45
 p y = 2 mv = 1.41 mv
25b 0
Two bodies are projected at angles θ and (90 – θ) to the 2u sin  2u sin(90 −  )
horizontal with the same speed. The ratio of their times T1 = g
and T2 =
g
of flight is
T1
a) 1 : 1  = tan θ
b) tan θ : 1 T2
c) 1 : tan θ
d) tan2 θ : 1
26a In PROBLEM 25, the ratio of their horizontal ranges is Range is same for complimentary angles.
a) 1 : 1
b) tan θ : 1
c) 1 : tan θ
d) tan2 θ : 1
27d In PROBLEM 25, the ratio of their maximum heights is u 2 sin 2  u 2 sin 2 (90 −  )
a) 1 : 1 H1 = and H2 =
2g 2g
b) tan θ : 1
H1
c) 1 : tan θ  = tan2θ
d) tan2 θ : 1 H2
28a At the top of the trajectory of an oblique projectile, the At the top of the trajectory the velocity is just along
directions of its velocity and acceleration are to each the horizontal, whereas g is still acting vertically
other downwards. So both are perpendicular.
a) Perpendicular
b) Parallel
c) 450
d) None of these
29d Two stones are projected with same initial speed but Range is same for complimentary angles. So, other
making different angles with the horizontal such that 
their horizontal ranges are equal. If the angle of angle is .
6
  
projection of one projectile is and its height is H, then u 2 sin 2  
3
So H’ =
6
the maximum height of other projectile will be
a) H 2g
b) 2H u2 3u 2
 H’ =
. Also H =
c) 3H 4g 4g
H H
d)  H’ =
3 3
30b A projectile is projected in the upwards direction making u sin  − gt
an angle of 600 with the horizontal with a velocity of 147 Since, tanβ = u cos 
ms-1. Then the time after which its inclination with the 147 sin 60 − 9.8t
horizontal is 450 is nearly  tan 45 =
a) 1.732 s 147 cos 60
b) 5.49 s
 147 cos 60 = 147 sin 60 – 9.8t
c) 11.27 s
 t = 5.49 s
d) 9.81 s
DESCRIPTION OF MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION
1a The velocity acquired by a body when if falls through a V = 2gh and v’ = 2 g (h + x)
height h is v. If it further falls through a height x(x << h), 1
the increase in velocity is approximately  x 2
vx  v’ = 2 gh 1 + 
a)  h
2h Since x << h
2v  x 
b)  v’ = v 1 +
xh 
 2h 
2vx
c) vx
h  Increase in velocity =
2h
v
d)
2 xh
2b A body falling from a given height H hits an inclined plane Let time taken by body to go from A to B be t, and
in its path at a height h. As a result of this impact, the that to go from B to C be t2. Then
direction of the velocity of the body becomes horizontal. 2( H − h) 2h
h t1 = and t2 =
Then the value of for which the body will take the g g
H
maximum time to reach the ground is
1
a)
2
1
b)
2
c) 2
d) 2
2
 Total time t = t1 + t2 = H − h + h 
g
dt
For t to be maximum = 0, we have
dh
h 1
=
H 2
3c In PROBLEM 2, the time taken will be H
Substituting h = from PROBLEM 2, in expression
2 H 2
a)
g for t we get value of tmax
2H
b)
g
H
c) 2
g
H
d) 4
g
4b 1 On passing through a plank of thickness x, the
A bullet loses of its velocity in passing through a
20 19
velocity of bullet becomes u, where u is the initial
plank. The least number of planks required to stop the 20
bullet is velocity.
a) 10 2
 19u 
b) 11  
2
 - u = 2ax …(1)
c) 12  20 
d) 23 Let the bullet further pass through n planks. Hence
total number of planks = (n + 1)
02 – u2 = 2a(n + 1)x …(2)
Solving we get, (n + 1)  11
5c A ball is thrown vertically upwards. It was observed at a Let the ball be at height h at time t and time (t + Δt).
height h twice with a time interval Δt. The initial velocity Then
of the ball is 1
h = ut - gt2 and …(1)
a) 8 gh + g (t )
2 2
2
1
 g t 
2
h = u(t + Δt) - g(t + Δt)2 …(2)
b) 8 gh +   2
 2  Equating (1) and (2), we get
1 2u − g t
8 gh + g 2 ( t )
2
c) t= …(3)
2 2g
8 gh + 4 g 2 ( t )
2
d) substituting (3) in (1), we get
4u 2 − g 2 (t ) 2
h=
8g
1
 u= 8 gh + g 2 (t ) 2
2
6b A bus starts moving with acceleration 2 ms-2. A cyclist 96
m behind the bus starts simultaneously towards the bus
at 20 ms-1. After what time will he be able to overtake the
bus? 1
Distance travelled by the bus is s1 = (2)t2
a) 4 s 2
b) 8 s  s1 = t 2
c) 12 s Distance travelled by the cyclist in this time is
d) 16 s s2 = 20t
For cyclist to catch the bus
1
20t = 96 + (2)t2
2
 t2 – 20t + 96 = 0
 (t – 8)(t – 12) = 0
 t = 8 s or t = 12 s
So, we assume that the bus is caught by the cyclist at
lower time value (which appears earlier)
7c A body covers a total distance of 3S. The first S is covered Total Dis tan ce
with a velocity u the second S with v and the last S with vav = Total Time
w. Then the average velocity during the whole journey is
S+S+S
u+v+w  vav =
a) S S S
3 ++
3uvw u v w
b) 3uvw
u+v+w  vav =
3uvw uv + vw + uw
c)
uv + vw + uw
d) Zero
8b, c A body falls from a large height h in t second. The time 1
taken to cover the last metre is h = gt2
2
1 1 2
a) (h – 1) = gt
gh 2
1 Time to fall through the last metre = t – t’
b)
2h   1  
1/2
2gh  t – t’ = 1 − 1 −  
1 g   h  
c)
gt Since it falls from large height so
1/2
1  1 1
d) 1 −   1 −
2gt  h 2h
1
 t – t’ =
2gh
1 1
 t – t’ = =
1  gt
2 g  gt 2 
2 
9a If a particle takes t second less and acquires a velocity of v v1 − v2 2a1s − 2a2 s
v ms-1 more in falling through the same distance on two = =
t t2 − t1 2s 2s
planets where the accelerations due to gravity are 2g and −
8g respectively then a2 a1
a) v = 4gt
b) v = 5gt
 v= ( )
a1a2 t
c) v = 2gt 
v = (2 g )(8 g )t
d) v = 16gt

v = 4gt
10a An armoured car 2m long and 3 m wide is moving at 10 2 = (v cos θ – 10)t and
ms-1 when a bullet hits it in a direction making an angle 3 = (v sin θ)t
3 1 3 
tan-1   with the length of the car as seen by a  t=  − 2
4 10  tan  
stationary observer. The bullet enters one edge of the car  
at the corner and passes out at the diagonally opposite
1  3 
corner. Neglecting any interaction between the car and  t=  − 2
the bullet, the time for the bullet to cross the car is 10   3  
4 
a) 0.20 s   
b) 0.15 s 1
c) 0.10 s  t= (4 – 2)
10
d) 0.50 s  t = 0.2 s
11c A graph between the square of the velocity of a particle From graph
and the distance s moved by the particle is shown in the v12 = (final velocity)2 = 900 km2h-2
figure. The acceleration of the particle in kilometer per
hour square is
v12 = (initial velocity)2 = 3600 km2h-2
S = Distance covered = 0.6 km
Since, v12 - v12 = 2as we get a = -2250 kmh-2
a) 2250
b) 225
c) -2250
d) -225
12b A body falls from rest, in the last second of its fall, it 1 2
covers half of the total distance. If g is 9.8 ms-2, then the h = 2 gt
total time of its fall is (in second) h 1
a) 2 = g(t – 1)2
2 2
b) 2+2 Solving (1) and (2), we get
c) 2 - 2 t=2± 2 s
d) 2 ± 2 But 2 - 2 <1s
 t=2+ 2 s
 t = 3.41 s
13d In PROBLEM 12, the total height of the fall is 1
a) 4.9 m h = gt2
2
b) 9.8 m  h = 57.1 m
c) 14.6 m
d) 57.1 m
14c The position x of the particle varies with time t as a = at2 – X = at2 – bt3
bt3. The acceleration of the particle will be equal to zero dx
at time t given by  v= = 2at – 3bt2
dt
2a dv
a)  acceleration = = 2a – 6bt
3b dt
a For acceleration = 0
b)
b a
t=
a 3b
c)
3b
d) Zero
15d A stone tied to a string of length L is whirled in a vertical vi = initial velocity = velocity at lowest point
circle with the other end of the string at the centre. At a  vi = uiˆ
certain instant of time, the stone is at the lowest position
vf = final velocity = velocity when the string becomes
and has a speed u. The magnitude of the change in
vertical
velocity as it reaches a position where the string is
horizontal is v12 − v12 = 2(-g)L
a) u 2 − 2 gL  vf = u 2 − 2 gL (in magnitude)
b) 2gL
c) u 2 − gL
d) 2(u 2 − gL)
 vf = ( )
u 2 − 2 gL ˆj
v = v f − vi ( )
u 2 − 2 gL ˆj − uiˆ
 v = u 2 − 2 gL + u 2 = 2 ( u 2 − gL )
16c A ball is dropped from a bridge 122.5 m above the river. 1 2
After the ball has been falling for 2 s, a second ball is h = 2 gt
thrown straight after it. What must be the initial velocity
of the second ball so that both hit water at the same time
a) 49 ms-1 1
b) 55.5 ms-1  122.5 = (9.8)t2
2
c) 26.1 ms-1  t2 = 25
d) 9.8 ms-1  t=5s
When released 2 s late with initial velocity u (say)
then ball has to cover 122.5 m in just (5.2) = 3 s
1
 122.5 = 3u + (9.8)(3)2
2
 u = 26.1 ms-1
17a The numerical ratio of the numerical value of velocity to velocity
speed is 0 1
speed
a) Less than one
b) Less than zero
c) Greater than one
d) None of these
18b A particle moves in a straight line with a velocity v1 = Displacement = ar(ΔAOB) + ar(ΔABCD) = 16 m
|t – 4|ms-1 where t is time in second. The distance
covered by the particle in 8 s is
a) 8 m
b) 16 m
c) 4 m
d) 2 m
19a Six persons are initially at the six corners of a hexagon of

side a. Each person now moves with a uniform speed v in
such a manner that 1 is always directed towards 2, 2
towards 3, 3 towards 4 and so on. The time after which
they meet is
2a
a)
v
a a a
b)
v t= =
 2   
2a v − v cos   2v sin 2  
c)  n  n
3v
where n is the number of sides in a symmetrical
a polygon. For this problem n = 6
d)
2v a 2a
 t= =
  v
2v sin 2  
6
20a A parachutist drops freely from an airplane for 10 s Initial velocity of dropping = zero
before the parachute opens. He then descends with a Let v1 be velocity at end of 10 s.
uniform retardation of 2.5 ms-2. If the bails out of the  v1 = gt
plane at a height of 2495 m and g is 10 ms-2, his velocity  v1 = 100 ms-1
on reaching the ground will be Distance travelled during this time is
v12 (100 )
-1
a) 5 ms 2
b) 10 ms -1
h1 = =
c) 15 ms-1 2 g 2(10)
d) 20 ms-1  h1 = 500 m
So, a remaining distance of 2495 – 500 = 1995 m has
to be travelled with a retardation of 2.5 ms-2. Let the
parachutist strike the ground with velocity v. Then
v2 – v’2 = 2a(h – h’)
 v2 – (100)2 = 2(-2.5)(1995)
 v2 = 10000 – 9975
 v2 = 25
 v = 5 ms-1
21b A body starts from origin and moves along x axis such vt = 4t3 – 2t
that at any instant velocity is vt = 4t3 – 2t where t is in dxt
second and vt is in ms-1. The acceleration of the particle  dt
= 4t3 – 2t
when it is 2 m from the origin is
a) 28 ms-2
  
dxt = 4t 3dt − 2tdt 
b) 22 ms-2  xt = t 4 – t2
c) 12 ms-2 Since, xt = 2 m
d) 10 ms-2  t4 – t2 - 2 = 0
 t = 2 s {Rejecting negative time}
Now acceleration is
dvt
at = = 12t 2 − 2 = 12(2) − 2 = 22 ms-2
dt
22a Galileo’s experiment showed that if two bodies of Conceptual
unequal masses are dropped from the same height, the
times required by them to reach the ground are equal. If
they are thrown vertically upwards with the same initial
velocity, then the ratio of the times required to reach the
ground is equal to
a) Unity
b) The ratio of their masses
c) The inverse of the ratio of their masses
d) The product of their masses
23c The variation of velocity of a particle moving along a Distance is the area under the curve
straight line is shown in figure. The distance traversed by
the particle in 4 second is
a) 60 m
b) 25 m
c) 55 m
d) 30 m
24a The acceleration is constant when the relationship V2  s
between the  acceleration is constant
a) Position coordinate s and the square of the
velocity v is linear
b) Position coordinate s and the velocity v is linear
c) Position coordinate and the reciprocal of the
d) Square of the position coordinate s and the
25d The displacement of a particle undergoing rectilinear dx
motion along the x-axis is given by x = (2t3 + 21t2 + 60t + V= = 6t2 + 42t + 60
dt
6)m. The acceleration of the particle when its velocity is V=0
zero is  t2 + 7t + 10 = 0
a) 36 ms-2  t = -5 s
b) 9 ms-2 Or t = -2 s
c) -9 ms-2 dv
d) -18 ms-2 a= = 12t + 42
dt
a t =−5 s = -60 + 42 = -18 ms-2
a t =−2 s = -24 + 42 = 18 ms-2

26a The motion of a body falling from rest in a resisting dv
= a – bv
dv dt
medium is described by the equation = a − bv where v t
dt dv
a and b are constants. The velocity at any time t is  0 a − bv = 0 dt
a)
a
v1 =
b
(1 − e−bt ) 
1
− [loge(a – bv) - loge(a)] = t
b
b − bt a − bv
b) v1 = e  = e-bt
a a
a a
− bt
c) v1 = (1 + e )  v = (1 – e-bt)
b b
OBJECTIVE TRICK
b − bt
d) v1 = e At t = 0 i.e. initially, velocity must be zero (as stated in
a the problem) and this condition is met only by Option
A.
27b The engineer of a train moving at a speed v1 sights a For no collision to exist the initial relative velocity (v1
freight train a distance d ahead of him on the same track – v2) must be reduced to zero in a distance less than
moving in the same direction with a slower speed v2. He the existing separation (d).
puts on the brakes and gives his train a constant Let the train be stopped in a distance s.
deceleration α. Then there will be no collision is  02 – (v1 – v2)2 = 2(-α)s
v1 − v2 ( v1 – v2 )
2
a) d= 
2 s=
2
(v − v ) 2 For no collision
b) d 1 2
2 s<d
(v − v ) 2 (v1 − v2 ) 2
c) d 1 2  d
2 2
(v1 − v2 )
d) d
2
28b A body starts from the origin and moves along X axis such vt = 4t3 – 2t
that the velocity at any instant is given by 4t3 – 2t where t dx
is in second and velocity in ms-1. What is the acceleration  dt
= 4t3 – 2t
of the particle when it is 2 m from the origin  dx = (4t3 – 2t)dt
a) 28 ms-2
b) 22 ms-2
 x = 4 t 3dt − 2 tdt  
c) 12 ms-2  t4   t2 
d) 10 ms-2  x = 4  − 2 
4 2
 x = t 4 – t2
At x = 2
t4 – t2 – 2 = 0
 t4 – 2t2 + t2 – 2 = 0
 (t2 + 1)(t2 – 2) = 0
 t=± 2 s
dv
a= = 12t2 – 2
dt
 a t = 2 s = 24 – 2
 a = 22 ms -2
29b An express elevator can accelerate or decelerate with In this problem, we must check that the distance
values whose magnitudes are limited to 0.4 g. The travelled by the elevator while accelerating plus the
elevator attains a maximum vertical speed of 400 metre distance travelled by the elevator while decelerating
per minute. The minimum time required by the elevator must equal 100 m. If this is not satisfied then the
to start from rest from the 10th floor and to stop at the remaining distance must have been travelled with a
30th floor, a distance 100 m apart is uniform speed equal to the maximum speed attained
a) 1.67 s by the elevator at the end of accelerated motion
b) 16.7 s
c) 167 s
d) 1670 s
30a, c At the instant a motor bike starts from rest in a given Distance travelled by motor bike at t = 18 s
direction, a car overtakes the motor bike, both moving in 1
the same direction. The speed time graphs for motor bike sbike = s1 = (18)(60) = 540 m
2
and car are represented by OAB and CD respectively. Distance travelled by car at t = 18 s
Then scar = s2 = (18)(40) = 720 m
Therefore, separation between them at t = 18 s is 180
m.
Let separation between them decreases to zero at
time t beyond 18 s.
Hence, sbike = 540 + 60t and scar = 720 + 40t
scar – sbike = 0
 720 + 40t = 540 + 60t
 t = 9 s beyond 18 s or
a) At t = 18 s the motor bike and car are 180 m t = (18 + 9) s = 27 s from start and distance travelled
apart. by both is sbike = scar = 1080 m
b) At t = 18 s the motor bike and car are 720 m
apart.
c) The relative distance between motor bike and
car reduces to zero at t = 27 s and both are 1080
m far from origin.
d) The relative distance between motor bike and
car always remains same.
VECTORS
1c The sides of the triangle representing three force vectors a : b : c :: 2000 : 1732 : 1000
are in the ratio 2000 : 1732 : 1000. The angles of the 1.732 1
triangle (in degrees) are  a : b : c :: 1 : :
2 2
a) 70, 65, 45
3 1
b) 80, 55, 45  a : b : c :: 1 : :
c) 90, 60, 30 2 2
d) 90, 61, 39 So according to law of sines the angles of the triangle
in degree s are 900, 600 and 300.
2c If two non parallel vectors A and B are equal in ( A + B).( A − B) = A. A − B.B = A2 − B 2
( )
magnitude, then the vectors A − B and A + B will ( )  ( A + B).( A − B) = 0
be  ( A + B ) ⊥ ( A − B)
a) Parallel to each other
b) Parallel but oppositely directed
c) Perpendicular to each other
d) Inclined at an angle θ < 900
3a A particle starts from rest at the origin with a constant 1 2
r= at
acceleration a = 2iˆ + 8 ˆj − 6kˆ ms-2. Its position at t = 5 s 2
is 1
 r = (2iˆ + 8 ˆj − 6kˆ)(25)
a) ( 25iˆ + 100 ˆj − 75kˆ ) m 2
 r = (iˆ + 4 ˆj − 3kˆ)25
b) ( 25iˆ −100 ˆj − 75kˆ ) m  r = 25iˆ + 100 ˆj − 75kˆ
c) (100iˆ − 25 ˆj + 75kˆ ) m
d) ( 25iˆ −100 ˆj + 75kˆ ) m
4b If your non zero vectors satisfy a x b = c x d and axb = cxd …..(1)
a x c = b x d with a  d and b  c , then axc = bxd …..(2)
Subtracting (2) from (1), we get
a) ( a − d ) and (b − c ) are perpendicular (axb ) − (axc ) = (cxd ) − (bxd )
b) ( a − d ) and (b − c ) are parallel  ax(b − c ) = (c − b ) xd
c) ( a − d ) must equal (b − c ) 

ax(b − c ) = −(b − c ) xd
ax(b − c ) + (b − c ) xd = 0
d) ( a − d ) must equal − (b − c )  ax(b − c ) − dx(b − c ) = 0
 (a − d ) x(b − c ) = 0
So, (a − d ) and (b − c ) are parellel
5c A point of application of force F = −5iˆ + 3 ˆj + 2kˆ is W = F .r
moved from r1 = 2iˆ + 7 ˆj + 4kˆ to r2 = 5iˆ + 2 ˆj + 4kˆ . The  W = F .(r2 − r1 )
work done will be  W = (−5iˆ + 3 ˆj + 2kˆ).(3iˆ − 5 ˆj + 0kˆ)
a) -22 unit  W = - 15 – 15
b) 22 unit  W = -30 unit
c) -30 unit
d) +30 unit
6a
If Â is a unit vector. The value Aˆ .
dAˆ
= We know Aˆ . Aˆ = 1, where Â is any unit vector.
dt
a) 0 d ˆ ˆ
b) 1  ( A. A) = 0
dt

c) dAˆ dAˆ
2  Aˆ . + Aˆ . =0
dt dt
d) π
 dAˆ 
 2  Aˆ . 
 dt 
dAˆ
 Aˆ . =0
dt
7a
( ) (
Three forces F1 = 3iˆ + 2 ˆj − kˆ N, F2 = 3iˆ + 4 ˆj − 5kˆ N ) F1 + F2 + F3 = 0
( )
and F3 = A iˆ + ˆj − kˆ N act simultaneously on a particle.  3iˆ + 2 ˆj − kˆ + 3iˆ + 4 ˆj − 5kˆ + Aiˆ + Ajˆ − Akˆ = 0
In order that the particle remains in equilibrium, the

 iˆ(6 + A) + ˆj (6 + A) + kˆ(−6 − A) = 0
value of A should be  (iˆ + ˆj − kˆ)(6 + A) = 0
a) -6  6+A=0
b) 6  A = -6
c) 9
d) -9
8a The vector having module equal to 6 and perpendicular A vector perpendicular to two vectors Aand B is
to the two vectors A = 2iˆ + 2 ˆj + kˆ and AxB
ˆ ˆ ˆ A x B . If n̂ is the unit vector. Then nˆ = 
B = 2i − 2 j + 3k is AxB
a) (
 4iˆ − 2 ˆj − 4kˆ ) So, a vector perpendicular to Aand B of magnitude
b)  ( 6iˆ + 2 ˆj − 4kˆ ) R is R n̂ .
iˆ ˆj kˆ
c) − ( 6iˆ − 2 ˆj − 6kˆ )
 AxB = 2 2 1
d) ( 6iˆ − 2 ˆj − 6kˆ ) 2 −2 3
 A x B = 8iˆ − 4 ˆj − 8kˆ
1
 nˆ =  (8iˆ − 4 ˆj − 8kˆ)
12
3
 R = Rnˆ =  (8iˆ − 4 ˆj − 8kˆ)
12
 R = (2i − ˆj − kˆ)
ˆ
9b If vectors a = 2iˆ + 4 ˆj − kˆ and b = 3iˆ − 2 ˆj + xkˆ are to be For perpendicular vectors a and b
perpendicular to each other, the value of x should be a .b = 0
a) 2
b) -2  (2iˆ + 4 ˆj − kˆ).(3iˆ − 2 ˆj + xkˆ) = 0
c) 3  6–8–x=0
d) -3  -x = 2
 x=-2
10c A vector C = A − B has a magnitude equal to A + B, the C = A− B
angle between A and B is C = A+ B
a) Zero
 (A + B)2 = A2 + B2 – 2AB cos θ
 A2 + B2 + 2AB = A2 + B2 – 2AB cos θ
  cos θ = -1
b)  θ = 1800
2
c) π  θ=π
d) 2π
11c Three forces F1 = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj , F2 = 2iˆ − ˆj − kˆ and F1 + F2 + F3 + F4 = 0
F3 = 4iˆ + 2 ˆj + kˆ act simultaneously on a particle. The F4 = 0 − F1 − F2 − F3
force F4 that must be applied in order to keep particle in F4 = 0 − 2iˆ − 3 ˆj − 2kˆ + ˆj + kˆ − 4iˆ − 2 ˆj − kˆ
equilibrium should be F4 = −8iˆ − 4 ˆj
a) (8iˆ + 4kˆ)
F4 = −(8iˆ + 4 ˆj )
b) −8iˆ + 2 ˆj + kˆ
c) −(8iˆ + 4kjˆ)
d) 8iˆ − 4 ˆj + kˆ
12d 2 2 2 2
AxB + A.B is equal to AxB + A.B
( A + B) = A2B2 sin2 θ + A2B2 cos2θ

2
a)
= A2B2 (sin2θ + cos2θ)
( A − B) = A2B2
2
b)
c) A2 + B2
d) A2B2
13c
( )
In equation F = q vxB , the quantity F Conceptual
a) Is perpendicular v only
b) Is perpendicular to B only
c) Is perpendicular to both v and B
d) Is perpendicular to q and B
14b In the arrangement shown in figure, the instantaneous Let AC = x and the length of string string between B
velocities of masses m1 and m2 are v1 and v2 respectively and m2 be y. Since A and B are fixed, so AO and BO
and ACB = 2θ at the instant, then are constants.
Let AO = BO = l
Since length of string is a constant
 AC + CB + y = constant
 2 2
+ x 2 + y = constant
1
1 2 −1 d dy
 2 ( +x ) 2 2
( 2 + x2 ) + =0
2 dt dt
2 x  dx  dy
 v1    + =0
a) θ = cos-1   2
+ x 2  dt  dt
 2v2  2x
 v   v1 + v2 = 0
b) θ = cos  2  -1 2
+ x2
 2v1  x
Since cos θ =
 v  2
+ x2
c) θ = tan-1  1 
 2v2   2 cos θ v1 + v2 = 0
v2
 cos θ = −
2v1
 v1  Negative sign indicates that v1 and v2 are directed
d) θ = sin-1   opposite to each other.
 v2   v2 
 θ = cos-1  
 2v1 
15a The correct expression in the following is ax(bxc ) = (a.c )b − (a.b )c
a) ( )
ax bxc + bx ( cxa ) + cx axb = 0 ( ) bx(cxa ) = (b .a )c − (b .c )a
b) a. ( b .c ) + b . ( c .a ) + c . ( a.b ) = 0 cx(axb ) = (c.b )a − (c.a )b
c) a. ( bxc ) + b . ( cxa ) + c. ( axb ) = 0  ax(bxc ) + bx(cxa ) + cx(axb ) = 0
d) a. ( b + c ) + b . ( c + a ) + c. ( a + b ) = 0
16c A particle moves from point (1, 0, 25) to the point (-2, 3, Displacement ( s ) = (−2iˆ + 3 ˆj + 4kˆ) − (iˆ + 2.5kˆ)
4)m when a force F = (iˆ + 4kˆ) N acts on it. The work
 s = (−3iˆ + 3 ˆj + 1.5kˆ) m
done on it is
a) 6 J F = (iˆ + kˆ) N
b) 30 J
Work done = F .s
c) 3 J
d) 9 J  W = (3iˆ + 3 ˆj + 1.5kˆ).(iˆ + 4kˆ)
 W = -3 + 0 + 6 = 3 J
17c ˆ ˆ
The vector that is added to (i − 5 j + 2k ) and ˆ Let the required vector be r
(3iˆ + 6 ˆj − 7kˆ) to give a unit vector along the x-axis is  r = iˆ − ˆj + 5kˆ − 3iˆ − 6 ˆj + 7kˆ
a) 3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ  r = − ˆj − 3iˆ + 5kˆ
b) iˆ + 3 ˆj + 5kˆ  r = −3iˆ − ˆj + 5kˆ
c) −3iˆ − ˆj + 5kˆ
d) 3iˆ + ˆj − 5kˆ
18b Forces of 1 N and 2 N act along the lines x = 0 and y = 0. Direction of resultant will be given by tanθ, where θ is
The equation of the line along which the resultant lies is the angle which resultant makes with x-axis.
given by y 1
a) Y – 2x = 0  tanθ = =
x 2
b) 2y – x = 0  2y – x = 0
c) Y + x = 0
d) Y – x = 0
19a The radius vector of a point is r = (iˆ − 2 ˆj + 3kˆ) m and a Moment of Force =  = rxF
force F = (4iˆ + 5kˆ) acts at the point. The moment of the   = (iˆ − 2 ˆj + 3kˆ) x(4iˆ + 5 ˆj )
force in Nm is  
a) −15iˆ + 12 ˆj + 13kˆ iˆ ˆj kˆ
b) 15iˆ − 12 ˆj + 13kˆ 1 −2 3
c) −15iˆ − 12 ˆj + 13kˆ 4 5 0
d) 15iˆ + 12 ˆj + 13kˆ  = iˆ(0 − 15) − ˆj (0 − 12) + kˆ(5 + 8)
 = −15iˆ + 12 ˆj + 13kˆ
( )
20c The area of a triangle bounded by vectors a, b and c is 1 1 1
Area of  = bxc = axb = cxa
2 2 2
1 1 1 1
a) a +b +c  3 = bxc + axb + cxa
2 2 2 2
1
b) a.b + b .c + c .a 1
2  3 = bxc + axb + cxa
2
1
c) (bxc ) + (cxa ) + (axb )  1
6   = (bxc ) + (axb ) + (cxa )
6
1
d) (a.b ) + (b .c ) + (c .a )
2
21d If a = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + kˆ and b = 3iˆ + ˆj − 2kˆ , the cosine of a.b = ab cos θ
angle θ between them is equal to
 6 − 3 − 2 = (4 + 9 + 1)(9 + 1 + 4) cos 
5
a) 1
14  cos 
1 14
b)
7
3
c)
14
1
d)
14
22d A particle is moving in a circle of radius r centred at O v = v2 − v1
with constant speed v. The change in velocity in moving
from P to Q( POQ = 400) is v = v 2 + v 2 − 2v 2 cos 40
 v = v 2 − 2cos 40
 v = 2v 1 − cos 40
 v = 2v 2sin 2 20
{ 1 – cos (2θ)= 2sin2θ}
 v = 2v sin (20)
0
a) 2v cos 40
b) 2v sin 400
c) 2v cos 200
d) 2v sin 200
23d Following set of forces act on a body. In which case the The zero resultant can only be produced by three
resultant cannot be zero? vectors when they form a closed triangle whose sides
a) 10 N, 10 N, 20 N are in the same order. For a triangle to be formed the
b) 10 N, 10 N, 10 N sum of any two sides must be greater than the third
c) 10 N, 20 N, 20 N side.
d) 10 N, 20 N, 40 N
( )
24b
( )
d d dA dB
AxB AxB = xB + Ax
dt dt dt dt
dB dA
a) Ax + Bx
dt dt
dA dB
b) xB + Ax
dt dt
dB dA
c) − Ax − xB
dt dt
d) 0
25a If l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2 are the direction cosines of two cos θ = l1l2 + m1m2 +n1n2
vectors and θ is the angle between them, then the value
of cos θ is
a) l1l2 + m1m2 +n1n2
b) l1m1 + m1n1 + n1l1
c) l2m2 + m2n2 + n2l2
d) m1l2 + l1m2 + n1m2
26d When t = 0, a particle at (1, 0, 0), moves towards (4, 4, 12) r = 4iˆ + 4 ˆj + 12kˆ
1
with a constant speed of 65 ms-1. The position of the
particle is measured in meter and the time in second. r1 = iˆ
Assume constant velocity, the position of the particle for  r = r1 − r2
t = 2 s is
 r = 3iˆ + 4 ˆj + 12kˆ
a) (30iˆ − 120 ˆj + 40kˆ) m
 r = 32 + 42 + 122
b) (40iˆ + 31 ˆj − 120kˆ) m
c) (13iˆ − 40 ˆj + 12kˆ) m  r = 13
d) (31iˆ + 40 ˆj + 120kˆ) m r
Since v =
t
r
 65 =
t
13 1
 t = = s
65 5
Velocity vector is
r
v=
t
3iˆ + 4 ˆj + 12kˆ
 v=
1
 
5
 v = 15iˆ + 20 ˆj + 60kˆ
Since particle has uniform velocity, so
r = r0 + vt
 r = iˆ + (15iˆ + 20 ˆj + 60kˆ)2
 r = 31iˆ + 40 ˆj + 120kˆ
27a A force F = (−3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ) N acts at a point (7, 3, 1). The F = (−3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ) N
torque about the origin (0, 0, 0) will be r = 7iˆ + 3 ˆj + kˆ − 0iˆ − 0 ˆj − 0kˆ
a) 14iˆ − 38 ˆj + 16kˆ  r = (7iˆ + 3 ˆj + kˆ)
b) 14iˆ + 38 ˆj − 16kˆ
 = rxF
c) 14iˆ − 38 ˆj − 16kˆ   = (7iˆ + 3 ˆj + kˆ) x(−3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ)
d) 14iˆ + 38 ˆj + 16kˆ iˆ ˆj kˆ
  =7 3 1
−3 1 5
  = iˆ(15 − 1) − ˆj (35 + 3) + kˆ(7 + 9)
  = 14iˆ − 38 ˆj + 16kˆ
28b The two vectors Aand B that are perpendicular to each For A ⊥ B we must have A.B = 0
other are
a) A = 3iˆ + 3 ˆj + 2kˆ, B = 2iˆ − 2 ˆj + kˆ
b) A = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj + 2kˆ, B = 2iˆ − 2 ˆj + kˆ
c) A = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + 2kˆ, B = 2iˆ − 2 ˆj − kˆ
d) A = iˆ + 3 ˆj + 2kˆ, B = 2iˆ − 2 ˆj + kˆ
29d If F1 xF2 = F1.F2 , then F1 + F2 is F1 xF2 = F1 . F2
a) F1 + F2  F1F sin θ = F1F2 cos θ
 tan θ = 1
b)
2
F1 + F2
2
 θ = 450
F1 + F2 = F12 + F22 + 2F1F cos 45
2 2 F1 F2
c) F1 + F2 +  F1 + F2 = F12 + F22 + 2F1F2
2
2 2
d) F1 + F2 + 2 F1 F2
30d ABCD is a quadrilateral. Forces BA, BC , CD and DA act
at the point. Their resultant is
a) 2 AB  R = BA + BA { BC + CD + DA = BA }
b) 2 DA  R = 2 BA
c) 2 BC
d) 2 BA
UNITS, SIGNIFICANT FIGURES, MEASUREMENT & ERRORS

1d The measurement 8,987652 km is rounded to 4 The significant figures are 4, therefore only four digits
significant figures. The value of measurement will be will be in the measurement. The next fifth number is
written as 6 which is greater than 5; hence the number 7 to be
(a) 8.9876 rounded off must be increased by one, hence the
(b) 8.9877 measurement has value 8.988. so D is correct.
(c) 8.987
(d) 8.988
2c The volume of one sphere is 1.76 cm3. What is the Total volume = 25(1.76)
volume of 25 such spheres (according to the idea of Total volume = 44.00 cm3
significant figures)? The number of significant figures in the volume is 3.
3
(a) 44.000 cm So the required volume is 44.0 cm3
3
(b) 44.00 cm
(c) 44.0 cm3
(d) 44 cm3
3b The value of resistance is 10.845Ω and the value of Conceptual
current is 3.23 A. The potential difference is 35.02935 V.
Its value is significant number would be
a) 35 V
b) 35.0 V
c) 35.03 V
d) 35.029 V
4c If y = a + b, the maximum percentage error in the Conceptual
measurement of y will be
 a b 
a)  +  x100%
 a b 
 a b 
b)  −  x100%
 a b 
 a b 
c)  +  x100%
 a+b a+b 
 a b 
d)  −  x100%
 a+b a+b 
5a The length, breadth and thickness of a block is measured Conceptual
to be 50 cm, 2.0 cm and 1.00 cm. What is the percentage
error in the measurement of volume?
a) 8%
b) 0.8%
c) 10%
d) 12.5%
6b The density of a material of a cube is calculated by m m
measuring its mass and a side. What is the maximum d = V = 3
percentage error in the density if the errors in the d m 3
measurement of a side and mass are 3% and 4%  = +
respectively. d m
a) 15% d
% = 4 + 9 = 13%
b) 13% d
c) 7%
d) 5%
7d The rate of change of velocity of a body falling from rest By principle of Homogeneity
in a resisting medium is described by equation
dv
= At –
 dv 
dt  dt  = [At] = [Bv]
Bv. The dimensions for A and B are  LT-2 = [A]T and LT-2 = [B]LT-1
a) LT-3, T  [A] = LT-3, [B] = T-1
-1
b) LT, T
c) LT, T
d) LT-3, T-1
8d Two resistances are expressed as R1 = (4 ± 0.5)Ω and R2 = RS = R1 + R2 = 16 
(12 ± 0.5)Ω. What is the net resistance when they are R1 R2 R1 R2
connected (i) in series and (iv) in parallel, with percentage R P= = = 3
R1 + R2 RS
error?
 RS =  R1 +  R2 = 1 
a) 16Ω ± 23%, 3 Ω ± 6.25%
RS 1
b) 16 Ω ± 2.3%, 3 Ω ± 6.25%  x100 = x100%
c) 3 Ω ± 23%, 16 Ω ± 6.25% RS 16
d) 16 Ω ± 6.25%, 3 Ω ± 23% RS
 x100 = 6.25%
RS
 RS = 16  ± 6.25%
Similarly
R1 R2
RP =
RS
RP R1 R2 RS
 = + +
RP R1 R2 RS
RP 0.5 0.5 1
 = + +
RP 4 12 16
RP
 = 0.23
RP
RP
 x 100 = 23%
RP
 RP = 3  ± 23%
effective = = 0 +r
9b The length of string of simple pendulum is 101.4 cm and
the diameter of bob is 2.64 cm. What is the effective
length of simple pendulum upto required significant 
2.64
= 101.4 +
figures? 2
a) 102.72 cm  = 101.4 + 1.32
b) 102.7 cm  = 102.72 cm
c) 102.73 cm Since, in addition the least number of decimal figures
d) 102.6 cm which occur among the added quantities is to be
taken. Here the number of least decimal figure in the
length is 1, hence
= 102.7 cm
10d Dimensional representation of thermal resistance is equal Temperature Difference
to Thermal Resistance =
Thermal Current
a) ML2T-3K-1
b) ML2T-2K-1
Temperature Difference
Thermal Resistance =
c) ML2T-3K-2 Rate of flow of heat
-1 -2 3
d) M L T k T
Thermal Resistance =
 Q 
 
 t 
K
[Thermal Resistance] = = M-1L-2T3K
 ML2T −2 
 
 T 
11a  a   a 
In vander Waal’s equation  p + 2 
(V – b) = RT, [P] =  2 
 V  V 
dimensions of a would be
 ML-1T-2 =
a
a) ML5T-2
L6
b) ML3T-2
 5 -2
[a] = ML T
c) ML-1T-2
and
d) M0L0T0
[b] = [V] = L3
12b A cube has numerically equal volume and surface area. Conceptual
The volume of such a cube is
a) 212 unit
b) 216 unit
c) 200 unit
d) 215 unit
13d The solar constant is defined as the energy incident per Conceptual
unit area per second on the earth. The dimensions of
solar constant are thus given by
a) M0L0T0
b) MLT-2
c) ML2T-2
d) MT-3
14a If E, m, L, G denote energy, mass, angular momentum and EL2
gravitational constant respectively then dimensions of Let Z = 5 2
mG
EL2  [Z] = M0L0T0
will be that of
m 5G 2 Which is same as that of angle
a) Angle
b) Length
c) Mass
d) Time
15b The frequency of vibration n of the stretched string of Conceptual
P T
length l under tension T in P loops is given by n = .
2l m
Then m has got dimensions as that of
a) Density (M1L-3)
b) Linear Density (M1L-1)
c) Tension (M1L1T-2)
d) Surface Tension (MT-2)
16b One centimeter on the main scale of a vernier calipers is 1
divided into 10 equal parts. If 10 divisions of vernier 1 MSD = 10 cm = 0.1 cm
coincide with 8 small divisions of the main scale, the least 10 VSD = 8 MSD
count of calipers is 8
a) 0.01 cm  1 VSD = MSD
b) 0.02 cm 10
8
c) 0.05 cm  1 VSD = (0.1) cm
d) 0.005 cm 10
 1 VSD = 0.08 cm
Least count = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
 Least count = 0.1 – 0.08 = 0.02 cm
Here above, MSD denoted Main Scale Divisions and
VSD indicated Vernier Scale Division
17d Which of the following pairs of physical quantities DOES Conceptual
NOT have same dimensions
a) Latent heat and gravitational potential
b) Angular frequency and velocity gradient
c) Surface energy and spring factor
d) Impulse and rate of change of potential
18c A screw gauze has 100 parts on circular scale and on  
rotation of a full circular scale, the screw advances a  
 Least   Pitch( p ) 
distance of 1 mm. The least count of screw gauze is
 =
 
a) 0.1 cm  Count  Number of Divisions 
b) 0.01 cm  
 on Circular Scale 
c) 0.001 cm
1mm
d) 0.02 cm  Least Count = = 0.001 cm
100
19a The error in the measurement of radius of the sphere is A = 4πr2
0.3%. what is the permissible error in its surface area? A r
a) 0.6% =2 = 0.6%
A r
b) 1.2%
c) 1.8%
d) 2.4%
20d Assuming that the mass m of the largest stone that can Conceptual
be moved by a flowing river depends upon the velocity v
of water, its density d and acceleration due to gravity g.
Then m is directly proportional to
a) v3
b) v4
c) v5
d) v6
21a S.I. unit of universal gas constant is Conceptual
a) JK-1mole-1
b) NK-1mole-1
c) WK-1mole-1
d) ergK-1mole-1
22c While measuring the acceleration due to gravity by a
simple pendulum a student makes a positive error of 1% Since T = 2π
g
in the length (l) of the pendulum and an error of 3% in
the value of time period (T). His percentage error in the 
 T2 = 4π2 
measurement of g will be
g
a) 2%
 
b) 4%  g = 4π2  2 
c) 7% T 
d) 10% g  2 T
 = +
g T
 Errors donot propagate 
 
 for cons tan t values 
g
 x 100 = 1% + 2(3%)
g
g
 x 100 = 7%
g
23a The damping force on an oscillating body is proportional Conceptual
to it velocity. The constant of proportionality has the
dimensions of
a) MT-1
b) MLT-2
c) MT-3
d) M0L0T0
24b A scientist performs an experiment and takes 100 1
readings. He repeats the same experiment and now takes Error  N
400 readings. By doing so
Where N is the number of observations
a) The probable error remaining the same
b) The probable error is halved E2 N1 100 1
 = = =
c) The probable error is doubled E1 N2 400 2
1
d) The probable error is reduced by a factor of
4
25b Tesla is the unit of Conceptual
a) Magnetic flux
b) Magnetic field
c) Magnetic induction
d) Magnetic moment
26a The relative density of a material may be found by Let Relative density be denoted by R, then
weighing it first in air and then in water. If its weight in air Wair
is (5.00 ± 0.05)N and weight in water is (4.00 ± 0.05)N. R=
Then the relative density along with maximum Wair − Wwater
permissible error will be quoted as Wair
a) 5.0 ± 11%  R= =5
b) 5.0 ± 6% W
c) 5.0 ± 1% Error in W is 0.05 + 0.05
d) 1.25 ± 5%   W = 0.10 N
R Wair W
= +
R Wair W
R 0.05 0.1
 = +
R 5 (5 − 4)
R
 = 0.01 + 0.1
R
R
 x 100 = 11%
R
So, R = 5 ± 11%
27c Dimensional formula for entropy is identical to that of Heat Absorbed
a) Universal Gas constant Entropy =
Temperature
b) Specific Heat
Q
c) Boltzmann constant  S=
d) Gravitational Potential T
 [S] = ML2T-2K-1
Also,
1
E= KBT
2
2 −2
 E  ML T
 [KB] =   = = ML2T-2K-1
T  K
28c If y = ab, the maximum percentage error in the Conceptual
measurement of y will be
 a 
 x100% 
a)
 a 
 b 
 x100% 
 b 
 a   b 
b)  x100%  x  x100% 
 a   b 
 a b 
c)  +  x100%
 a b 
 a b 
d)  −  x100%
 a b 
29a An athletic’s coach told him that muscle times speed Conceptual
equals power. What dimensions does the coach view for
muscle
a) MLT-2
b) ML2T-2
c) MLT2
d) M0L1T0
30d The formula, W = (F + 2Ma)vn, where W is the work, F is Since work done is always equal to the product of
the force, M is the mass, a is the acceleration and v is the force and distance and in no ways velocity can be a
velocity can be made dimensionally correct for substitute for distance/displacement. So the relation
a) n = 0 holds good for “no value of n”.
b) n = 1
c) n = -1
d) No value of n
ELECTROSTATICS
1c A and B are two points in an electric field. If the work done Since
in carrying 4.0 C of electric charge from A to B is 16.0 J, the WA→B = q(VB – VA)
potential difference between A and B is 16
(a) Zero  VB – VA = =4V
4
(b) 2.0 V
(c) 4.0 V
(d) 16.0 V
2b The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are separated by d  t d −t 
cm. A plate of thickness t cm with dielectric constant k1 is V = 4πσ  + 
inserted and the remaining space is filled with a plate of  k1 k2 
dielectric constant k2. If Q is the charge on the capacitor 4 Q  t d − t 
and area of plates is A cm2 each, then potential difference  V = A  k + k 
between the plates is  1 2 
Q  t d −t 
(a)  + 
 0 A  k1 k2 
4 Q  t d − t 
(b)  + 
A  k1 k2 
4 Q  k1 k2 
(c)  + 
A  t d −t 
Q  k1 d − t 
(d)  + 
0 A  t k2 
3d In the circuit shown, which of the following statements is Let charge on C1 be Q1 and that on C2 be Q2 then,
true if V1 (potential across C1) is 30 V and V2 (potential Q1 = 60 pC and
across C2) is 20 V. Q2 = 60 pC
So, when S1 and S3 are closed then C1 and C2 are in
series and same charge exists on both. Since in series
combination, no redistribution of charges take place
and hence V1 and V2 have same value for S1 and S3
closed.
(a) With S1 closed, V1 = 15 V, V2 = 25 V

(b) With S3 closed, V1 = V2 = 25 V
(c) With S1 and S2 closed, V1 = V2 = 0
(d) With S1 and S3 closed, V1 = 30 V, V2 = 20 V
4b A parallel plate capacitor of value 1.77 µF is to be designed A
using a dielectric material (dielectric constant = 200, C = k 0
d
breakdown strength = 3 x 106 Vm-1). In order to make such A
a capacitor, which can withstand a potential difference of  1.77 x 10-6 = 200(8.85 x 10-12)
20 V across the plates, the separation between the plates
d
A
d and the area A of the plates can be (  0 = 8.85 x 10-12 C2  = 103
d
N-1 m-2)
This ratio is satisfied by both options (A) and (B). So to
(a) d = 10-6 m, A = 10-3 m2
arrive at a conclusion we take help of the break through
(b) d = 10-5 m, A = 10-2 m2
strength.
(c) d = 10-4 m, A = 10-4 m2
For option (A)
(d) d = 10-4 m, A = 10-5 m2
d = 10-6 m
v
 E=
d
20
 E = −6
10
 E = 2 x 107 Vm-1 > 3 x 106 Vm-1
Which is impossible
For option (B)
d = 10-5 m
v
 E=
d
20
 E = −6
10
 E = 2 x 106 Vm-1 < 3 x 106 Vm-1
Hence option (B) is right to give as an answer.
5a Two point charges q1 = 4 µC and q2 = 9 µC are placed 20 EP = 0
cm apart. The electric field due to them will be zero on the 4 9
line joining them at a distance of  =
x 2
(20 − x) 2
(a) 8 cm from q1
20 − x 3
(b) 8 cm from q2  =
80 x 2
(c) cm from q1  40 – 2x = 3x
13  x = 8 cm
80
(d) cm from q2
13
6a If a solid body is negatively charged by friction, it means A body is charged negatively when it gains electrons
that the body has and positively when it loses electrons. Protons do not
(a) Acquired excess of electrons play any role in charging of a body.
(b) Lost some protons
(c) Acquired some electrons and lost a lesser number
of protons
(d) Lost some positive ions
7b An oil drop is found floating freely between the plates of a qE = Mg
parallel plate condenser, the plates being horizontal and 
the lower plate carrying a charge +Q. The area of each q = Mg
0
plate is A and the distance of separation between them is
D. The charge on the oil drop must be (g is the Q
q = Mg
acceleration due to gravity) A 0
Ag MgA 0
(a)  q=
QM Q
 MgA
(b) 0
Q
AgQ
(c) −
D
MgA
(d) −
0
8d A cylinder of radius R and length L is placed in a uniform
electric field E parallel to the cylinder axis. The total flux
for the surface of the cylinder is given by
(a) 2πR2E
(b) πR2E
(c) (πR2 + πL2)E Flux due to curved surface = 0
(d) Zero Since field lines enter at one end and exit at other, so
total flux equals zero.
9c Three identical charges are placed at the corners of an
Fnet = F 2 + F 2 + 2 F 2 cos 60
equilateral triangle. If the force between any two charges
is F, then the net force on each will be  Fnet = 3 F
(a) 2F
(b) 2F
(c) 3F
(d) 3F
10c Two concentric, thin metallic spheres of radii R1 and R2 (R1
> R2) bear charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Then the
potential at distance r between R1 and R2 will be
 1 
k = 
 4 0 
 Q + Q2 
(a) k  1 
 r  Q2 Q1
Q Q  Vr = +
(b) k  1 + 2  4 0 r 4 0 R1
 r R2  1  Q2 Q1 
Vr =  + 
 Q2 Q1  4 0  r R1 
(c) k  + 
 r R1 
Q Q 
(d) k  1 + 2 
 R1 R2 
11b If a charge is moved against the Coulomb force of an For moving a charge against a Coulomb force, some
electric field work has to be done by the external agency.
(a) Work is done by the electric field
(b) Energy is used from some outside source
(c) The strength of the field is decreased
(d) The energy of the system is decreased
12b, d A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 100 µF is charged q
to 500 V. The plate separation is then reduced to half its V =
C
original value. Then 1
(a) The potential on the capacitor becomes 1000 V Since C 
(b) The potential on the capacitor becomes 250 V
d
So, as d is halved, C becomes double
(c) The change in stored energy is 3.75 x 10-5 J
q
(d) The change in stored energy is 6.25 J  V’ =
C'
V C'
 = =2
V' C
V
 V’ = = 250 V
2
1 2
Ui = CV
2
2
1 1 V 
Uf = C’V’2 = (2C)  
2 2 2
1
Uf = CV2
4
1
 change = CV2
4
1
 change = (100 x 10-6)(500)2
4
  U = 6.25 J
13b A parallel plate capacitor has circular plates of 0.08 m 0 A
radius and 1.0 x 10-3 m separation. If a potential difference C = d
of 100 V is applied, the charge on the capacitor will be
1  (0.08) 2
(a) 1.8 x 10-10 C  C=
(b) 1.8 x 10-8 C 4 x9 x109 10−3
(c) 1.8 x 10-20 C  C = 1.8 x 10-10 F
(d) None of the above Since Q = CV
 Q = 1.8 x 10-8 C
14b A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to Total initial charge
a battery and is charged to a potential difference V. Qi = (2C)(2V) – CV = 3CV
Another capacitor of capacitance 2C is similarly charged to Total final charge
potential difference 2V. The charging battery is now Qf = 2CV’ + CV’
disconnected and the capacitors are connected in parallel Where V’ is common potential,
to each other in such a way that the positive terminal of By law of conservation of charge
one is connected to the negative terminal of the other. Qi = Q f
The final energy of the configuration  3CV = 3CV’
(a) Zero  V’ = V
3 2 So, final energy of combination is
(b) CV
2 1 3
Uf = (C + 2C)V2 = CV2
25 2 2 2
(c) CV
6
9 2
(d) CV
2
15c The work done in increasing the voltage across the plates 1
of a capacitor from 5 V to 10 V is W. The work done in W = 2 C(100 – 25)
increasing the voltage from 10 V to 15 V will be 1
(a) W W’ = C(225 – 100)
2
4W
(b) 5
3  W’ = W
3
5W
(c)
3
(d) 2W
16d A flat circular disc has a charge +Q uniformly distributed Conceptual
on the disc. A charge +q is thrown with kinetic energy E,
towards the disc along its normal axis. The charge q will
(a) Hit the disc at the centre
(b) Return back along its path after touching the disc
(c) Return back along its path without touching the
disc
(d) Any of the above three situations is possible
depending on the magnitude of E
17b The radii of two spheres forming a spherical condenser are  ab 
0.5 m and 0.6 m. If a medium of dielectric constant 6 is C = 4 0  b − a 
 
completely filled in between, the capacity of the
condenser will be 1 (0.5)(0.6)
C=
(a) 3.3 x 10-10 F 9 x109 0.1
(b) 2 x 10-9 F 0.3
 C=
(c) 2 F 9 x108
(d) 18 F  C’ = KC
 C’ = 2 x 10-9 F
18c The electric intensity due to a uniformly charged infinite 
cylinder of radius R, at a distance r(> R), from its axis is E = 2 r
0
proportional to
1
(a) r2  E
(b) r3 r
1
(c)
r
1
(d) 2
r
19b, c In the given circuit is steady state 10
Cs = µF
7
10
Q = CsV = x 14
7
 Q = 20 µC
Q 20
Further VC1 = = =4V
C1 5
(a) The potential difference across C1 is 10 V
Q 20
(b) The potential difference across C2 is 10 V Similarly VC2 = = = 10 V
(c) The charge on C1 is 20 µC C2 2
(d) The charge on C2 is 8 µC
20c Two capacitors C1 and C2 in a circuit are joined as shown in Conceptual
figure. The potentials of points A and B are V1 and V2
respectively; then the potential of point D will be
(V1 + V2 )
(a)
2
C2V1 + C1V2
(b)
C1 + C2
C1V1 + C2V2
(c)
C1 + C2
C2V1 − C1V2
(d)
C1 + C2
21d The radius of a hollow metallic sphere is R. if the potential Q Q
difference its surface and a point at a distance of 3R from V = 4 R − 4 (3R )
0 0
its centre is V, then the electric field intensity at a distance
1  2Q 
of 3R from its centre is  V=  
V 4 0  3R 
(a)
2R  3VR 
 Q = (4 0 )  
V  2 
(b)
3R Q
V  E=
(c) 4 0 (3R) 2
4R
 3VR 
V 4 0  
(d)  2 
6R  E=
4 0 (3R) 2
V
 E=
6R
22c The electric field due to a point charge at a distance R Conceptual
from it is E. If the same charge is placed on a metallic
sphere of radius R, the electric field on the surface of the
sphere will be
(a) Zero
E
(b)
2
(c) E
(d) 2E
23c Two free charges q and 4q are placed at a distance d apart. For equilibrium of Q
A third charge Q is placed between them at a distance x qQ 4qQ
from charge q such that the system is in equilibrium. Then k 2 =k
x (d − x)2
4q d
(a) Q = ,x = d−x
9 3  =2
x
4q d 
(b) Q = ,x = d–x=2x
9 4 d
4q d  x=
(c) Q = − ,x = 3
9 3
4q d
(d) Q = − ,x =
3 4
For equilibrium of q
kQq k 4q 2
+ 2 =0
x2 d
Qq 4q 2
 + =0
(d 2 / 9) d 2
 9Q + 4q = 0
4q
 Q= −
9
24d Two particles having charges Q1 and Q2, when kept at a According to Coulomb’s Law
certain distance exert a force F on each other. If the QQ
distance between the two particles is reduced to half and F  12 2
r
the charge on each particle is doubled, the force between  F’ = 16F
the particles would be
(a) 2F
(b) 4F
(c) 8F
(d) 16F
25c Potential at a point at a distance r from the centre of a q
uniformly charged sphere of radius a(< r) is proportional to V = 4 r
0
(a) a3
1
(b) r  V
1 r
(c)
r
1
(d)
a3
26c If 4 x 1020 eV of energy is required to move a charge of W = q∆V
0.25 C between two points, then the potential difference  4 x 1020 x 1.6 x 10-19 = 0.25 ∆V
between the points is  ∆V = 256 V
(a) 64 V
(b) 128 V
(c) 256 V
(d) 512 V
27a How many electrons will have a charge of one coulomb? By charge quantization
(a) 6.25 x 1018 Q = ne
(b) 6.25 x 10 19
 1 = n(1.6 x 10-19)
(c) 5.25 x 10 18
 n = 6.25 x 1018
19
(d) 5.25 x 10
28a A parallel plate capacitor is located horizontally such that Conceptual
one of the plates is submerged in a liquid while the other
is above the liquid surface. When plates are charged the
level of liquid
(a) Rises
(b) Falls
(c) Remains unchanged
(d) May rise or fall depending on the amount of
charge
29a Two isolated, charged conducting spheres of radii R1 and Same electric field near surfaces gives
R2 produce the same electric field near their surfaces. The Q1 Q2
=
ratio of electric potentials on their surfaces is 4 0 R1 4 0 R22
2
R1
(a) Q1 R12
R2  =
Q2 R22
Further
R2 V1 Q1 R2 R1  Q 
(b) = =  V= 
R1 V2 Q2 R1 R2  4 0 R 
R12
(c)
R22
R22
(d)
R12
30c A charged particle of mass m and charge q is released from Velocity of particle at time t is v = at where a =
rest in a uniform electric field E. The kinetic energy of the F qE
particle after time t is =
m m
2E 2t 2 qEt
(a)  v=
mq m
Eq 2 m 1 q 2 E 2t 2
(b) So, K.E. = mv2 =
2t 2 2 2m
E 2 q 2t 2
(c)
2m
Eqm
(d)
2t
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
1b The sensitivity of potentiometer can be increased by Conceptual
(a) Increasing e.m.f. of cell
(b) Increasing length of potentiometer wire
(c) Decreasing length of potentiometer wire
(d) Decreasing e.m.f. of battery of main circuit
2c A 10 m long wire of resistance 20Ω is connected in series Rtotal = 20 + 10 = 30 Ω
with a battery of e.m.f. 3V and a resistance of 10Ω. The V 3 1
potential gradient along the wire in volt per metre is I= = = A
Rtotal 30 10
(a) 0.02
So, Vwire = IRwire
(b) 0.1
(c) 0.2 1
(d) 1.2
 Vwire = (20)
10
 Vwire = 2 V
Hence, potential gradient is
Vwire 2
= = 0.2 Vm-1
10
3a Density of copper is 9 x 103 kgm-3 and its atomic weight is 63 g of Cu has 6.023 x 103 Cu atoms.
63. A current of 1.1 A is flowing in a copper wire of So, total number of free electrons is 6.023 x 1023
diameter 1 mm. If every atom of copper contributes one 6.023x1023
free electron then the drift velocity of electrons is n=
Volume of sample
approximately
(a) 0.1 mms-1 6.023x1023
 n=
(b) 0.2 mms-1  63 /1000 
(c) 0.3 mms-1  3 
-1  9 x10 
(d) 0.2 cms
I
Further, vd =
neA
1.1
 vd =
 6.023x10  23
−19
 −6  (1.6 x10 ) A
 7 x10 
2
 0.5 
Where A =   
 1000 
 vd = 0.10 x 10-3 ms-1
 vd = 0.1 mms-1
4c A cell of emf E is connected across a resistance r. The V = Ir (Terminal potential difference)
potential difference between the terminals of the cell is If R is internal resistance of battery, then
found to be V. The internal resistance of the cell must be E
I=
2( E − V )V R+r
(a)
r  IR + Ir = E
2( E − V )r  IR = E – V
(b)
R E −V
E  =
( E − V )r r V
(c)
V  −V
E 
 R=  r
(d) (E – V)r  V 
5d In the circuit shown each battery is 5V and has an internal Conceptual
resistance of 0.25Ω. The reading of the voltmeter is V.
Then V equals
(a) 5 V
(b) 10 V
(c) 15 V
(d) Zero
6d Seven resistors, each of 1Ω, are connected as shown in the RAB = RAC + RCB.
figure. The effective resistance between A and B is
4
(a) 
3
3
(b) 
2
(c) 7Ω
8
(d) 
7
7c In the given circuit, as the sliding contact C is moved from Conceptual
A to B
(a) The readings of both the ammeter and the

voltmeter remain constant
(b) The readings of both the ammeter and the
voltmeter increase
(c) The reading of the ammeter remains constant but
that of the voltmeter increases
(d) The reading of the ammeter remains constant but
that of the voltmeter decreases
8d Two resistances R1 and R2 are made of different materials. R1 + R2 = Constant
The temperature coefficient of the material of R1 is a and   (R1 + R2) = 0
that of material of R2 is –β. The resistance of the series  |  R1| = |  R2|
combination of R1 and R2 will not change with temperature  R1α  T = R2β  T
R1 R1 
if equals  =
R2 R2 

(a)

 +
(b)
 −
2 + 2
(c)
2

(d)

A S H O K A P H Y S I C S C L A S S E S , T I R U P A T I . C E L L N O . 9 4 4 0 0 2 5 1 2 5 . 10 |
74
9c Sixteen resistors each of resistance 16Ω are connected in
the circuit as shown. The net resistance between AB is
3R 3(16)
 RAB = = = 3
16 16
(a) 1Ω
(b) 2Ω
(c) 3Ω
(d) 4Ω
10c When an unknown resistance is connected across a series 2(1.5)
combination of two identical batteries, each of 1.5 V, the I=
R + 2r
current through the resistor is 1.0 A. When it is connected  R + 2r = 3 …(1)
across a parallel combination of the same batteries, the 1.5
current through it is 0.6 A. the internal resistance of each 0.6 =
battery is R + (r / 2)
1  2R + r = 5 …(2)
(a)  From (1) and (2), we get
5
7 1
1 R= , r = 
(b)  3 3
4
1
(c) 
3
1
(d) 
2
11d A potentiometer wire is 10 m long and has a resistance of Potential drop across a resistance of 20Ω is first to be
20Ω. It is connected in series with a battery of emf 3V and calculated
a resistance of 10Ω. The potential gradient along the wire  3 
in Vm-1 is V20 =   20
 10 + 20 
(a) 0.01
 V20 = 2 V
(b) 0.02
2
(c) 0.1  Potential Gradient equals = 0.2 Vm-1
(d) 0.2 10
12c In the circuit shown in figure, with steady current, the
potential drop across the capacitor must be
In steady state the branch containing the capacitor can

(a) V be omitted and hence current in the circuit is
2V − V
(b)
V I=
2 R + 2R
74
V V
(c)  I=
3 3R
2V For loop 36543
(d) -VC – V + 2V – I(2R) = 0
3
V
 VC = - V + 2V – (2R)
3R
2V V
 VC = V – =
3 3
13c A galvanometer with 50 divisions on the scale has a G = 25 Ω
resistance of 25Ω. A current of 2 x 10-4 A gives a deflection Ig = (2 x 10-4)(50)
of one scale division. The additional series resistance  Ig = 0.01 A
required to convert it into a voltmeter reading up to 25 V Since
is V
(a) 1200Ω R= −G
Ig
(b) 1225Ω
25
(c) 2475Ω  R= − 25
(d) 2500Ω 0.01
 R = 2500 – 25
 R = 2475 
14a A cell has an emf of 1.5 V. When short circuited, it gives a On short circuiting
current of 3 A. The internal resistance of the cell is E
(a) 0.5Ω I=
R
(b) 2.0Ω 1.5
(c) 4.5Ω  3=
R
1
(d)   R = 0.5 
4.5
15b, c A battery of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected Conceptual
to a variable resistor R as shown. Which one of the
following is true?
(a) Potential difference across the terminals of the

battery is maximum where R = r
(b) Power delivered to resistor is maximum when R =
r
(c) Current in the circuit is maximum when R = r
(d) Current in the circuit is maximum when R >> r
16d A steady current is flowing in a conductor of non-uniform Since the current is steady i.e., constant hence Charge
cross-section. The charge passing through any cross- passing through any cross-section per unit time is also
section per unit time is constant and hence independent of area.
(a) Directly proportional to the area of cross-section
(b) Inversely proportional to the area of cross-section
(c) Proportional to square of the area of cross-
section
(d) Independent of the area of cross-section
74
17a The equivalent resistance between A and B (of the circuit 7 Ω and 3 Ω are in parallel; 6 Ω and 4 Ω are in parallel
shown) is and both in series.
So
7 x3 4 x 6
 Req = +
7+3 4+6
 Req = 2.1 + 2.4
 Req = 4.5 
(a) 4.5Ω
(b) 12Ω
(c) 5.4Ω
(d) 20Ω
18d When a resistor of 20Ω is connected across a battery, the Let E be the e.m.f. and r be the internal resistance of
current is 0.5 A. When a resistor of 10Ω is connected battery. Then
across the same battery, the current is 0.8 A. The emf and E
internal resistance of the battery are 0.5 =
20 + r
(a) 10 V,
10
  E = 10 + 0.5 r
3 …(1)
20 E
(b) 20 V,  And 0.8 =
3 10 + r
40 10  E = 8 + 0.8 r
(c) V,  …(2)
3 3
40 20 From (1) and (2)
(d) V,  2 = 0.3 r
3 3
20
 r=  and
3
40
E= V
3
19a In the network shown, the equivalent resistance between 3, 4 and 6Ω all in parallel. Hence
A and B is 1 1 1 1
= + +
RP 3 4 6
1 4+3+ 2
 =
RP 12
12 4
 RP =  = 
9 3
4
(a) 
3
3
(b) 
4
24
(c) 
17
17
(d) 
24
74
20a For which of the following dependences of drift velocity vd, Conceptual
on electric field E, is Ohm’s Law obeyed?
(a)  d  E
(b) d  E 2
(c) d  E
(d) vd = constant
21a, d Constantan is used for making standard resistances Conceptual
because it has
(a) High specific resistance
(b) Low specific resistance
(c) Negligible temperature coefficient of resistance
(d) High melting point
22c A potentiometer wire is 10 m long. It has a resistance 20Ω. Conceptual
It is connected in series with a battery of e.m.f. 3V and
negligible internal resistance and a resistance of 10Ω. The
potential gradient along the wire in volt per metre is
(a) 0.02
(b) 0.1
(c) 0.2
(d) 1.2
23c A voltmeter of range 1 V has a resistance of 1000Ω. To Conceptual
extend the range to 10 V, the additional series resistance
required is
1000
(a) 
9
74
(b) 1000Ω
(c) 9000Ω
(d) 10000Ω
24c A primary cell has an emf of 1.5 V. When a 5Ω resistor is 1.5
connected across it, the current is 0.2 A. The internal 0.2 = 5 + r
resistance of the cell is  1 + 0.2 r = 1.5
(a) 0.5Ω 5
(b) 1.25Ω  r = = 2.5
(c) 2.5Ω 2
(d) 3.0Ω
25c The best instrument for accurate measurement of e.m.f. Conceptual
of a cell is
(a) A voltmeter
(b) An ammeter
(c) A potentiometer
(d) Wheatstone’s Bridge
26a, c In the circuit shown E, F, G and H are cells of e.m.f. 2V, 1V, Conceptual
3V and 1V respectively and their internal resistances are
2Ω, 1Ω, 3Ω and 1Ω respectively.
2
(a) VD - VB = − V.
13
2
(b) VD – VB = V
13
21
(c) VG = V = Potential difference across G.
13
19
(d) VH = V = Potential difference across H.
13
27d The carrier density (number of free electrons per m3) in Conceptual
metallic conductors is of the order of
(a) 1010
(b) 1016
(c) 1022
(d) 1028
28d Three resistors of 2Ω, 3Ω and 5Ω are connected in parallel In parallel, the potential across all the resistances is the
across a battery of 10V and of negligible internal same.
resistance. The potential difference across the 3Ω resistor
is
(a) 2V
(b) 3V
(c) 5V
(d) 10V
74
29b A potentiometer wire of length 100 cm has a resistance of E E
10Ω. It is connected in series with a resistance and an Since I = R = R + 10
eq
accumulator of emf 2 V and of negligible internal
resistance. A source of emf 10 mV is balanced against a 40  I = 2
cm length of the potentiometer wire. The value of the 10 + R
external resistance is 100 cm has a resistance of 10 Ω
(a) 395Ω 10
 40 cm has a resistance of x 40
(b) 790Ω 100
(c) 405Ω  R’ = 4 
(d) 810Ω So, potential difference across 4 Ω is
V’ = IR’ = 10 mV
 2 
 V’ =   4 = 10
-2
 10 + R 
 800 = 10 + R
 R = 790 
30d A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled Cooling increases the resistance of a semiconductor
from room temperature to 80K. The resistance of and decreases the resistance of a conductor.
(a) Each of them increases
(b) Each of them decreases
(c) Copper increases and that of germanium
decreases
(d) Copper decreases and that of germanium
increases
THERMAL, CHEMICAL AND THERMOELECTRIC EFFECTS OF CURRENT

1b In an antimony-bismuth thermocouple the direction of Conceptual
current in the circuit is
74
(a) From antimony to bismuth at hot junction
(b) From antimony to bismuth at cold junction
(c) From antimony to bismuth at both junction
(d) From bismuth to antimony at both junctions
2a Two bulbs which consume powers P1 and P2 are connected For a series circuit
in series. The power consumed by the combination is Rs = R 1 + R 2
(a) P1 + P2  I2Rs = I2R1 + I2R2
(b) PP  Ps = P1 + P2
1 2
P1 P2
(c)
P1 + P2
2P1 P2
(d)
P1 + P2
3d Three equal resistors connected in series across a source V2
of emf together dissipate 10 W power. If the same For series, 10 =
3R
resistors are connected in parallel across the same source,
the power dissipated will be V2
For parallel, P =
(a) 10 W R/3
(b) 30 W  P = 90 W
10
(c) W
3
(d) 90 W
4a One junction of a thermocouple is at a particular Thermoelectric power
temperature Tr and another is at T. Its thermo e.m.f. is dE d   1 
expressed as S= =  K (T − Tr ) . T0 − (T + Tr ) 
dT dT   2 
 1 
E = K(T – Tr) T0 − (T + Tr )   1  1 
 2  S = K(T – Tr) x  −  + T0 − (T + Tr )  xk
T  2  2 
At a temperature T = 0 , the value of thermo electric  d (uv)  dv   du  
2  = u   + v  
power will be  dx  dx   dx  
1 T0
(a) KT0 When T =
2 2
(b) KT0 K T   1T 
1 S = −  0 − Tr  + T0 −  0 + Tr   xK
(c) KT02 22   2 2 
2
− KT0 KTr KT KT
1  S= + + KT0 − 0 − r
(d) K(T0 – Tr)2 4 2 4 2
2
1
 S = KT0
2
5b A long resistance wire is divided into 2n parts. Then n parts V 2
V2
are connected in series and the other n – parts in parallel P1 = and P2 =
nr r
separately. Both combinations are connected to identical  
supplies. Then the ratio of heat produced in series to n
parallel combinations will be P1 1
 = 2
(a) 1 : 1 P2 n
(b) 1 : n2
(c) 1 : n4
74
(d) n2 : 1
6b Three equal resistors are connected as shown in figure. Let I be current in third resistance, then current in each
The maximum power consumed by each resistor is 18 W. I
Then maximum power consumed by the combination (in of two resistances in parallel is 2 .
watt) is Given I2R = 18 W
Maximum power consumed by combination is
2 2
I I 18 18
P =   R +   + I 2R = + + 18 = 27 W
2 2 4 4
(a) 18
(b) 27
(c) 36
(d) 54
7d Above the neutral temperature, the thermo e.m.f. Conceptual
(a) Changes sign
(b) Is constant
(c) Increases with the rise in temperature
(d) Decreases with the rise in temperature.
8b If a current is passed in a thermo-couple formed of two Conceptual
dissimilar metals, one junction is heated and other is
cooled. If π1 and π2 are the Peltier coefficients of cold and
hot junctions, then the net e.m.f. across the junction is
1 +  2
(a)
2
(b) (π2 – π1)
(c)  22 + 12
(d)  1 2
9d A piece of fuse wire melts when a circuit of 15 A flows P = I2R
through it. With this current, if it dissipates 22.5 W, the P 22.5
resistance of fuse wire will be  R= 2 = = 0.1
I (15) 2
(a) Zero
(b) 10 Ω
(c) 1 Ω
(d) 0.10 Ω
10a A current is passes for a time t in several voltameters Conceptual
connected in series. The masses of different substances
deposited/liberated on electrodes are directly
proportional to their
(a) Chemical equivalents
(b) Molecular weights
(c) Atomic weights
(d) Atomic numbers
11b A secondary battery has a 20 hour charge rate of 10 A and Ampere hour efficiency is
delivering 5 A for 36 hour and discharges with a mean Output Current x hour
terminal voltage of 1.96 V. The ampere hour efficiency is  = x 100%
Input Current x hour
(a) 9%
74
(b) 90% (5 A) x(36 hour )
(c) 20%  = x 100% = 90%
(10 A) x(20 hour )
(d) 100%
12c A bulb rated 220 V, 100 W is connected across 160 V line. V2
The power dissipated will be P =
R
(a) 100 W
For same resistance
(b) 75 W
P  V2
(c) 52 W 2 2
(d) 26 W P  V '   160 
 = =
   
P V   220 
2
 16 
 P’ =   x 100 = 52 W
 22 
13c When a battery sends current through a resistance R1 for  E 
2
 E 
2
time t, the heat produced in the resistor is H. When the   R1 =   R2

same battery sends current through another resistance R2  R1 + r   R2 + r 
for time t, the heat produced in R2 is again H. The internal  r = R1 R2
resistance of the battery is
R1 + R2
(a)
2
R1 − R2
(b)
2
(c) R1 R2
R1 R2
(d)
2
14b The temperature of inversion of a thermocouple is 700 0C Ti = 2Tn – T0
and the neutral temperature is 365 0C. Then the  T0 = 2Tn – Ti = 2 x 365 – 700 = 30 0C
temperature of cold junction must be
(a) 0 0C
(b) 30 0C
(c) 35 0C
(d) 65 0C
15d The power of a heater is 500 W at 800 0C. what will be its R800
power at 200 0C. (given temperature coefficient of R200 = 1 +  t
resistance, α = 4 x 10-4 0C-1) R800 R
(a) 484 W R200 = −4
= 800
(b) 672 W
1 + 4 x10 x600 1.24
2
(c) 526 W V
= 500 W
(d) 620 W R800
V2
And = P’
R200
P ' R800 R800
= =
P R200  R800 
 
 1.24 
P’ = 1.24 P = 1.24 x 500 = 620 W
16a A current is passed for time t in several voltameters put in Conceptual
74
series. The masses of different substances deposited or
liberated on electrodes are directly proportional to their
(a) Chemical equivalents
(b) Molecular weights
(c) Atomic weights
(d) Atomic numbers
17d A copper voltameter has a resistance of 1 Ω. It is R=1+2=3Ω
connected in series with a 2 V battery and a resistor of 2 2
Ω. The mass of Cu deposited in 1 hour is (E. C. E. of Cu =  I= A
3
0.00033 gC-1)  m = zIt  0.8 g
(a) 0.2 g
(b) 0.4 g
(c) 0.6 g
(d) 0.8 g
18d In PROBLEM 17, if the 2 Ω resistor is connected in parallel Here, I = 2 A
with the voltameter, the amount of Cu deposited will be  m = zIt  2.4 g
(a) 0.6 g
(b) 1.2 g
(c) 1.8 g
(d) 2.4 g
19c Two bulbs, one of 25 W, 220 V and another of 100 W, 220 In series, current through each bulb is same
V are connected in series across 220 V mains. The current
(a) Through 25 W bulb is more
(b) Through 100 W bulb is more
(c) Is same in the two bulbs
(d) It is difficult to draw any conclusion
20a Two heating coils, one of fine wire and the other of thick Thin wire has larger resistance than thick wire for same
wire made of same material and of same length are length and same material. In series current I is same, so
connected in series and then in parallel. Which of the heat produced H = I2Rt  R
following statement is correct i.e., in series thin wire liberates more heat. In parallel,
(a) In series, fine thin wire liberates more energy potential difference V is same, heat produced
while in parallel, thick wire liberates more energy. V2
(b) In series, fine thin wire liberates less energy while H= t
R
in parallel, thick wire liberates less energy .
1
(c) In series, thick wire liberates more energy while in  H
parallel, it liberates less energy. R
(d) Both wires liberate equal energies in series and So, a parallel thick wire liberates more heat.
parallel.
21a Two electric bulbs 40 W, 200 V and 100 W, 200 V are Maximum current in 40 W bulb,
connected in series. Then the maximum voltage that can P1 40 2
be applied across the combination, without fusing either I1 = = = 
V 200 10
bulb (in V) is Maximum current in 100 W bulb,
(a) 280 P2 100 5
(b) 400 I2 = = = 
(c) 3000
V 200 10
When bulbs are in series, obviously maximum current
(d) 200
2
may be  resistance of 40 W bulb is
10
74
V2 (200) 2
R1 = = = 1000
P1 40
Resistance of 100 W bulb is
V2 (200) 2
R2 = = = 400
P2 100
So, maximum voltage across system is
Vmax = (R1 + R2)Imax
2
 Vmax = (1000 + 400) x = 280 V
10
22b A 24 V battery of internal resistance 4 Ω is connected to a For maximum power R = 4 Ω
variable resistor. The rate of heat production in the 24
resistor is maximum when the current in the circuit is
 I = =3A
4+4
(a) 2 A
(b) 3 A
(c) 4 A
(d) 6 A
23a If N is the Avogadro’s number and e is the electronic Conceptual
charge then the Faraday constant F is equal to
(a) Ne
(b) N2e
(c) Ne2
1
(d)
Ne
24c A coil develops heat of 800 cal s-1 when a potential Conceptual
difference of 20 V is applied across its ends. The resistance
of the coil is (1 cal = 4.2 J)
(a) 1.2 Ω
(b) 1.4 Ω
(c) 0.12 Ω
(d) 0.14 Ω
25b A current of 1.5 A flows through a copper voltameter. The m = zIt
thickness of copper deposited on the electrode surface of If V is the volume, then
area 50 cm2 in 20 minute is (density of Cu = 9000 kgm-3; E. m zIt
C. E. of Cu = 3.3 x 10-7 kgC-1) V= =
 
(a) 1.3 x 10-4 m
(b) 1.3 x 10-5 m zIt 3.3x10−7 x1.5 x20 x60
Thickness = =
(c) 2.6 x 10-4 m A 50 x10−4 x9000
(d) 2.6 x 10-5 m  Thickness = 1.3 x 10-5 m
26a A 25 W-120 V bulb and a 100 W- 120 V bulb are connected 25 W bulb will be brighter because its resistance is
in series across 120 V line. The bulb which glows brightly is more and, in series, larger the resistance more is the
(a) 25 W-120 V power consumed.
(b) 100 W-120 V
(c) Both will have the same incandescene
(d) Neither will give any light
27a Which of the following is not reversible Conceptual
(a) Joule effect
(b) Peltier effect
(c) Seebeck effect
74
(d) Thomson effect
28a For a given temperature difference which of the following Conceptual
pairs will generate maximum thermo e. m. f.?
(a) Antimony – bismuth Silver – gold
(b) Iron – copper Lead – nickel
29a Two bulbs 100 W, 250 V and 200 W, 250 are connected in In series, V = V1 + V2
series across a 500 V line. Then V2 1
(a) 100 W bulb will be fused And R = 
P P
(b) 200 W bulb will be fused
R1 P2 200
(c) Both bulbs will be fused  = = =2
(d) No bulb will be fused R2 P1 100
In series, current I is same
V1 : V2 = 2 : 1
2
 V1 = x 500 = 333 V
3
1
And V2 = x 500 = 167 V
3
As, V1 > permissible voltage and V2 < permissible
voltage, so only 100 W bulb will get fused.
30d A torch bulb rated as 4.5 W, 1.5 V is connected as shown. P 4.5
The e. m. f. of the cell needed to make the bulb glow at Current in bulb I = V = 1.5 = 3 A
full intensity 4.5 W is Potential difference across 1Ω = 1.5 V
1.5
Current in 1Ω resistor is I = = 1.5 A
1
Total current drawn is I = 3 + 1.5 = 4.5 A
Potential difference across bulb V = E – Ir
 E = V + Ir = 1.5 + 4.5 x 2.67 = 13.5 V
(a) 4.5 V 1.5 V

(b) 2.67 V 13.5 V
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF CURRENT
1c A long thin wire is bent as shown in the figure. The radius 0 I
BXY =
of the semicircular part is r metres. If a current of I 4 r
ampere flows through the wire, then the magnetic 0 I
induction at O in tesla is BYP =
4r
0 I
BPQ =
4 r
0 I  2
 Btotal = 1 + 
4r   
0 I  1
(a) 1 +  out of the page
2r   
0 I  1 
(b) 1 +  into the page
2r   
74
0 I  2
(c) 1 +  out of the page
4r   
0 I  2 
(d) 1 +  into the page
4r   
2d A potential difference of 600 V is applied across the plates For no deflection
of a parallel plate capacitor. The separation between the Fm = Fe
plates is 3 mm. A magnetic field also exists between the
plates. An electron projected parallel to the plates as  qvB qE
shown with a speed of 2 x 106 ms-1 moves undeflected  E
B=
between the plates. The magnitude and direction of the v
magnetic field is V
 B=
vd
600
 B=
3
2 x106 x
1000
 B = 0.1 T
E points from lets to Right Fe acts towards positive
plate.
So, Fm must act towards negative plate and hence for
this B acts outwards (check by Fleming’s Left Hand
(a) 0.2 T, into the page
Rule)
(b) 0.2 T, out of the page
(c) 0.1 T, into the page
(d) 0.1 T, out of the page
3d A current of I ampere flows along an infinitely long Since no current is enclosed inside the hollow
straight thin walled hollow metallic cylinder of radius r. conductor. Hence Binside = 0
The magnetic field at any point inside the cylinder at a
distance x from the axis of the cylinder is
(a) 
0 I
(b)
2 r
0 I
(c)
2 x
(d) Zero
4a In PROBLEM 3, the magnetic field at any point outside the According to Ampere’s Circuital Law
cylinder at a distance x from the axis is

B.d = 0 I
0 I  B(2πx) = µ0I
(a)
2 x 0 I
 B=
0 I 2 x
(b)
2 ( x − r )
0 I
(c)
2 x 2
74
0 I
(d)
2 ( x − r ) 2
5b The strength of the magnetic field due to a long straight I
B= 0
conductor is 2 r
(a) The same everywhere around the conductor
(b) Inversely proportional to the distance from the
conductor
(c) Inversely proportional to the square of the
distance from the conductor
(d) Inversely proportional to the cube of the distance
from the conductor
6b In the given loop, the magnetic field at the centre O is Bstraight wires = 0
0 I
Bsmall arc = 
4r2
I
Bbig arc = 0 
4r1
0 I  r1 + r2 
 Btotal =  
4  r1r2 
0 I  r1 + r2 
(a)   out of the page
4  r1r2 
0 I  r1 + r2 
(b)   into the page
4  r1r2 
0 I  r1 − r2 
(c)   out of the page
4  r1r2 
0 I  r1 − r2 
(d)   into the page
4  r1r2 
7d A charged particle having kinetic energy E enters normally If it just misses hitting the plate P2, then radius of
a region of uniform magnetic field between two plates P1 circular track equals d.
and P2 as shown in the figure. If the particle just misses mv
hitting the plate P2, then the magnetic field B in the region  d=
qB
between the plates is
2mE
 d=
qB
2mE
 B=
qd
mE
(a)
2qd
74
2mE
(b)
qd
mE
(c)
2qd
2mE
(d)
qd
8b Magnetic lines of force Conceptual
(a) Always intersect
(b) Always form closed loops
(c) Tend to crowd far away from the poles of a
magnet
(d) Do not pass through vacuum
9a A long straight wire carries a current of 10 A. An electron F = qvB
travels with a speed of 5 x 106 ms-1 parallel to the wire 0.1  I
m away from it. The force exerted by the magnetic field of  F = qv  0 
 2 r 
the current on the electron is
 F = (1.6 x 10-19)(5 x 106)B
(a) 1.6 x 10-17 N
Where
(b) 3.2 x 10-17 N
(c) 1.6 x 10-18 N 2 x10 −7 x10
B =
(d) 3.2 x 10-18 N 0.1
 B = 2 x 10-5 T
 F = (1.6 x 10-19)(5 x 106)(2 x 10-7)
 F = 1.6 x 10-17 N
10d A current carrying circular coil is bent so as to convert it 0 I
into a double loop, both the loops being concentric and Binitial = 2r
carrying current in the same direction. If B is the initial 0 I I
magnetic field at the centre, the final magnetic field at the Binitial = + 0
centre will be r r
2  2 
(a) Zero 2 2
(b) B 2 0 I
 Bfinal = = 4Binitial
(c) 2B r
(d) 4B
11a A portion of a long straight wire, carrying a current I, is Field due to the straight sections is zero
bent in the form of a semicircle of radius r as shown in the I
figure. The magnetic field at the centre O of the Bsemicircle = 0
4r
semicircular, in tesla, is
4 x10 I −7
 B=
4r
I
 B= x 10-7
r
I
(a) x 10-7
r
I
(b)
r
I
(c) x 107
r
(d) Zero
74
12d A current I flows in a circular arc of wire which subtends Conceptual

3
an angle at the centre. If the radius of the circle is r
2
then the magnetic induction at B is
0 I
(a)
r
0 I
(b)
2r
30 I
(c)
4r
30 I
(d)
8r
13b A proton enters a magnetic field of flux density 1.5 Wbm-2 F = qvB sin 30
with a speed of 2 x 107 ms-1 at angle of 300 with the field. 1
The force on the proton will be  F = (1.6 x 10-19)(2 X 107)(1.5)  
2
(a) 0.24 x 10-12 N
 f = 2.4 X 10-12 N
(b) 2.4 x 10-12 N
(c) 24 x 10-12 N
(d) 0.024 x 10-12 N
14d A strong magnetic field is applied on a stationary electron. Since F = qvB
Then the electron So F = 0 for a stationary electron irrespective of value
(a) Moves in the direction of the field of B
(b) Moves opposite to the field
(c) Starts spinning
(d) Remains stationary
15a In cyclotron the gyro radius is Conceptual
(a) Proportional to momentum
(b) Proportional to energy
(c) Inversely proportional to momentum
(d) Inversely proportional to energy
16c A proton and an α – particle are projected with the same mv 2mK
kinetic energy at right angles to a uniform magnetic field. Since, r = =
Then
qB qB
(a) The α – particle will be bent in a circular path of  p2 
 K = 
smaller radius than that of the proton.
 2m 
(b) The α – particle will be bent in a circular path of
larger radius than that of the proton rP mP  q 
=   =1
(c) The α – particle and the proton will be bent in a r m  qP 
circular path of the same radius
(d) The α – particle and the proton will go through
the field undeflected.
17a Two very thin metallic wires placed along X and Y axes On line AB field due to two wires cancel (check
carry equal currents as shown. AB and CD are lines at 450 direction from Right Hand Thumb Rule)
with the axes having origin at O. the magnetic field will be
74
zero on the line.
(a) AB (B) CD
(b) Straight segment OB only of line AB
(c) Straight segment OC only of line CD
18c Two free parallel wires carrying currents in opposite Conceptual
directions
(a) Do not affect each other
(b) Attract each other
(c) Repel each other
(d) Get rotated to be perpendicular to each other
19d An electric charge q moves with a constant velocity v F = qvB sin θ
parallel to the lines of force of a uniform magnetic field B.  F=0
The force experienced by the charge is
(a) Bqv
B
(b)
q
B
(c)
q
(d) Zero
20c The magnetic field inside a current carrying toroidal Conceptual
solenoid is B. If its radius is doubled and the current
through it is also doubled, the magnetic field inside the
solenoid will be
B
(a)
2
(b) B
(c) 2B
(d) 4B
21a A unit of magnetic induction is Magnetic induction is the magnetic field.
(a) Wbm-2 Since φ = BA
(b) WbAm-1 
(c) Wbm-1
 B=
A
(d) Wb SI unit of φ is weber (Wb) and hence that of B is Wbm-2
(= tesla)
22a,c,d The current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer Conceptual
depends on
(a) The number of turns in the coil
(b) Moment of inertia of the coil
(c) Strength of the magnetic field
(d) Torsional constant of the suspension fibre
23b Two thin long parallel wires separated by a distance b are Conceptual
74
carrying a current I ampere each. The magnitude of the
force per unit length exerted by one wire on the other is
0 I 2
(a)
b2
0 I 2
(b)
2 b
0 I
(c)
2 b
0 I
(d)
2 b 2
24c Two particles X and Y having equal charge, after being 1 2mV
accelerated through the same potential difference enter a r =
B q
region of uniform magnetic field and describe circular
paths of radii R1 and R2 respectively. The ratio of the mass R1 mX
of X to that of Y is =
R 2 mY
R1 2
(a) mX  R1 
R2  = 
2
mY  R2 
R 
(b)  2 
 R1 
2
R 
(c)  1 
 R2 
R2
(d)
R1
25a In a moving coil galvanometer the current i is related to Conceptual
the deflection θ as
(a) I  θ
(b) I  tan θ
(c) I  θ2
(d) I  
26b The radius of curvature of the path of a charged particle in mv
a uniform magnetic field is directly proportional to the r=
qB
(a) Charge of the particle
(b) Momentum of the particle
(c) Energy of the particle
(d) Strength of the field
27d A 2 MeV proton (mass = 1.6 x 10-27 kg) is moving 1 2 -19 6
perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of 2.5 T. The 2 mv = 2 x 1.6 x 10 x 10
magnetic force on the proton is
4 x1.6 x10−13
(a) 2.5 x 10-10 N  v=
(b) 8 x 10-11 N 1.6 x10−27
(c) 2.5 x 10-11 N  v = 2 x 107 ms-1
-12 Since, F = qvB sin 90
(d) 8 x 10 N
 F = (1.6 x 10-19)(2 x 107)(2.5)
74
 F = 8 x 10-12 N
28a A charged particle is released from rest in a region of Since the charged particle is at rest, so initially, the
steady and uniform electric and magnetic fields which are magnetic field will not make it move. But initially, the
parallel to each other. The particle will move in a charged particle will experience an electrostatic force
(a) Straight line in the direction of electric field as a result of which it
(b) Circle gains a velocity parallel to E or parallel to B and hence
(c) Helix even after the motion of the particle it will not
(d) Cycloid experience a magnetic force i.e., its trajectory is a
straight line.
29c A moving charge produces Conceptual

(a) An electric field only
(b) A magnetic field only
(c) Both electric and magnetic fields
(d) Neither an electric nor a magnetic field
30d A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field exist No magnetic force acts on the electron and force due
in a region in the same direction. An electron is projected to electric field will act opposite to its initial direction
with velocity pointed in the same direction. The electron of motion. Hence its velocity decreases in magnitude.
will
(a) Turn to its right
(b) Turn to its left
(c) Keep moving in the same direction but its speed
will increase
(d) Keep moving in the same direction but its speed
will decrease
MAGNETOSTATICS
2
1c SI unit for measuring magnetic flux is called 1 Wb = 1 Tm
(a) Oersted
(b) Maxwell
(c) Weber
(d) Gauss
2b In the case of bar magnet, the lines of magnetic induction Conceptual
(a) Start from N – pole
(b) Run continuously through the bar and outside
(c) Emerge in circular paths from the middle of the
bar
(d) Are produced only at N – pole like rays of light
from a bulb
3c A freely suspended magnet oscillates with period T in For freely suspended magnet of magnetic moment M
74
earth’s horizontal magnetic field. When a bar magnet is oscillating in earth’s magnetic field
T 1
brought near it, the period decreases to
2
. The ratio of T = 2
MH
the field of the magnet, F to the earth’s magnetic field(H) …(1)
is Let bar magnet produce magnetic field F in the vicinity
(a) 1 : 3 of the oscillations of magnet.
(b) 1 : 1 As time period decreases, the net magnetic field must
(c) 3 : 1 increase; so that magnetic field = H + F.
(d) 9 : 1
T 1
 = 2
2 M (H + F )
…(2)
Dividing (1) by (2)
H +F
2=
H
F
 4=1+
H
F
Or = 3
H
…(3)
4d Hardness of a magnetic material is measured by the value Conceptual

of
(a) Magnetic induction
(b) Intensity of magnetization
(c) Density of magnetic material
(d) Coercive force
5b A thin magnet is cut into two equal parts by cutting. What If M(= ml) is magnetic moment of original magnet, then
is the new magnetic moment of each part? What is the magnetic moment of each part is M’ given by
time period of each part as compared to that of original m m M
magnet if vibrated in the same magnetic field? M’ =   ( ) = =
2 2 2
M T
(a) m = ,T ' = Moment of inertia of original magnet,
2 2
m0 2
M I=
(b) m = ,T ' = T 12
2 2
(m0 / 2) 1
(c) m = M,T’ = T Moment of inertia of each part = =
(d) m = M, T’ = 2T 12 2
Time period of original magnet is
1
T = 2π
MH
Time period of each part
74
(1/ 2)
T = 2π =T
( M / 2) H
i.e., time period remains unchanged
6a A watch glass containing some powdered substance is Iron is ferromagnetic and is strongly attracted by the
placed between the pole pieces of a magnet. Deep magnetic field.
concavity is observed at the centre. The substance in the
watch glass is
(a) Iron
(b) Chromium
(c) Carbon
(d) Wood
7a An electromagnet uses Conceptual
(a) Soft iron core
(b) Steel core
(c) Nickel core
(d) Copper core
8b The angle between geographical and magnetic meridian Conceptual
is called
(a) Angle of dip
(b) Angle of declination
(c) Latitude
(d) Longitude
9d (i) Soft iron conducts electricity. Conceptual
(ii) Soft iron is a magnetic material
(iii) Soft iron is an alloy of iron
(iv) Soft iron is used for magnetic permanent
magnets.
Out of the statements given above
(a) (i) and (ii) are correct
(b) (i) and (iiI) are correct
(c) (ii) and (iv)are correct
(d) (iii) and (iv) are correct
10a Agonic lines on magnetic map represent lines of Conceptual

(a) Zero declination
(b) Equal declination
(c) Zero dip
(d) Equal dip
11c Which of the following is most suitable for the core of the Soft iron has highest susceptibility
electromagnets?
(a) Air
(b) Steel
(c) Soft iron
(d) Cu – Ni alloy
12b Isogonic lines on magnetic map represent lines of Conceptual
(a) Zero declination
74
(c) Equal dip
(d) Equal horizontal field
13c The isoclinic lines on magnetic map represent lines of Conceptual
(a) Zero dip
(c) Equal dip
(d) Equal horizontal field
14a The relative magnetic permeability of paramagnetic Conceptual
substance is of the order of
(a) 1
(b) 10-2
(c) 10-4
(d) Zero
15b The ratio of SI units to C.G.S. unit for magnetic flux Magnetic flux density is the magnetic field.
density is 1 T = 104 G
(a) 103 1T
(b) 104 = 104
1G
(c) 10-4
(d) 10-3
16a Current I is flowing in a circular loop of area A placed in a Conceptual
magnetic field B, then the maximum couple acting on it is
(a) BIA
B
(b)
IA
I
(c)
BA
1
(d)
BIA
17d If the earth’s field induction at a place is 0.36 G and the Given Be = 0.36 G, θ = 600
angle of dip is 600. The horizontal and vertical Horizontal component,
components of the field are BH and BV respectively H = Be cos 600 = 0.36 x cos 600
0.18 1
(a) BH = 0.18 G, BV = G H = 0.36 x = 0.18 G
3 2
Vertical component,
(b) BH = 0.18 3 G, BV = 0.18 G
V = Be sin 600 = 3.36 sin 600
(c) BH = 0.18 G, BV = 0.36 G
3
(d) BH = 0.18 G, BV = 0.18 3 G V = 0.36 x = 0.18 3 G
2
18d A permanent magnet Conceptual

(a) Attracts all substance
(b) Attracts only ferromagnetic substance
(c) Attracts magnetic substances and repels all
others
(d) Attracts some substances and repels others
19d 1 Wbm-2 is equal to Conceptual
74
(a) 1 G
(b) 10 G
(c) 102 G
(d) 104 G
20c Two identical thin bar magnets, each of length l and pole The magnetic moment of each magnet
strength m are placed at right angles to each other with M1 = M2 = ml
the north pole of one touching the south pole of the The two magnetic moments are mutually
other. The resultant magnetic moment of the system is perpendicular, therefore net magnetic moment
(a) Zero
(b) 2ml
(c) 2 ml
ml
(d)
2
M12 + M 22 = (m ) + (m ) = 2m
2 2
M=
21b For which of the following substances the susceptibility Conceptual
obeys Curie law
(a) Diamagnetics
(b) Paramagnetics
(c) Ferromagnetic
(d) Superconductors
22b Magnetic field is measured by a Conceptual
(a) Thermopile
(b) Fluxmeter
(c) Pyrometer
(d) Thermometer
23b A steel wire of length l has a magnet moment M. it is then The magnetic pole strength,
bent into a semi-circular arc. The new magnetic moment magnetic moment m
is m = =
separation between poles
M
(a) …(1)
 When the wire is bent, the pole strength remains
2M unchanged. When it is in the form of semi-circular arc,
(b)
 the separation between poles is 2r, r being radius of
3M semi-circle. Given πr = l
(c)
 i.e., r =
4M 
(d) New magnetic moment

2
M’ = m . 2r = m .

Using (1), we get
M 2 2M
M’ = . =
 
74
24c A curve between magnetic moment and temperature of Magnetism of a magnet falls with rise of temperature
magnet is and becomes practically zero above Curie temperature
25c The magnetic permeability is maximum for Conceptual

(a) Diamagnetic
(b) Paramagnetic
(c) Ferro magnetic
(d) Is equal for all
26c If the magnetic flux is expressed in weber, then magnetic Φ = BA
induction can be expressed as 1 Wb = 1 Tm2
(a) Wbm  1 T = 1 Wbm-2
(b) Wbm2
(c) Wbm-2
(d) Wbm-1
27a The source of magnetic field as a/an Conceptual
(a) Current loop
(b) Static electric charge
(c) Isolated magnetic pole
(d) None of these
28a The line joining the points of horizontal components of Conceptual
earth’s field is called
(a) Magnetic meridian
(b) Magnetic axis
(c) Magnetic line
(d) Magnetic equator
29b In a vibration magnetometer, the time period of a bar 1
magnet oscillating in a horizontal component of earth’s T = 2π =2
magnetic field is 2 s. When the magnet is brought near
MH
and parallel to it, the time period reduces to 1 s. The ratio 1
T’ = 2π = 1 sec
H M (H + F )
  of the horizontal component H and the field F due
F H +F
to magnet will be Dividing 2 =
H
(a) 3
H 1
1  =
(b) F 3
3
(c) 3
1
(d)
3
30d A magnet of magnetic moment M is rotated through 3600 W = MB(cos θ1 – cos θ2)
74
in a magnetic field H, the work done will be W = MB[cos θ1 – cos(3600 + θ1)]
(a) MH W = MB(cos θ1 – cos θ1) = 0
(b) 2MH
(c) 2πMH
(d) Zero
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION & ALTERNATING CURRENTS

1b When a wheel with metal spokes, 1.2 m long, is rotated in 1
a magnetic field of flux density 5 x 10-5 Wbm-2 normal to Since  = 2 B
2
the plane of the wheel, an emf of 0.01 V is induced 1

between the rim and the axle. The frequency of rotation  0.01 = (5 x 10-5)(ω)(1.2)2
of the wheel is
2
 ω = 277.8 rad s-1
(a) 22 revolutions per second
277.8
(b) 44 revolutions per second  ω= rev s-1
22 2
(c) revolutions per second  ω = 44 rev s-1

44
(d) revolutions per second

2d A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R Since there exists no change in flux linked with the coil,
moves in its plane with a uniform velocity v perpendicular hence induced EMF equals zero.
to one of its sides. A magnetic induction B, constant in
time and space, pointing perpendicular and into the
plane of the loop exists everywhere. The current induced
in the loop is
BL
(a) clockwise
R
BL
(b) anticlockwise
R
2BL
(c) anticlockwise
R
(d) Zero
3a Two identical coaxial circular loops carry a current I each When loops approach each other the field becomes
circulating in the same direction. If the loops approach strong, which should not be allowed in accordance with
each other the current in Lenz’s Law. So, the current in both should be in such a
(a) Each decreases way that field decreases and hence I decreases.
(b) Each increases
74
(c) Each remains the same
(d) One increases whereas that in the other
decreases
4b A step up transformer connected to 220 V ac line is to N S 22000
supply 22 kV for a neon sign in secondary circuit. In = = 100
NP 220
primary circuit a fuse wire is connected which is to blow
when the current in the secondary circuit exceeds 10 mA.
The turn ratio of the transformer is
(a) 50
(b) 100
(c) 150
(d) 200
5a The mutual inductance of a pair of coils, each of N turns, dI

is M henry. If a current of I ampere in one of the coils is  =M (in magnitude)
dt
brought to zero in t second, the emf induced per turn in
I
the other coil, in volt, will be   = NM  
MI t
(a)  MI
t  =
NMI N t
(b)
t
MN
(c)
It
MI
(d)
Nt
6d If the number of turns per unit length of a coil of solenoid L = µ0n2Al
is doubled, the self inductance of solenoid will be
(a) Remain unchanged
(b) Be halved
(c) Be doubled
(d) Becomes four times
7c In a step-down transformer the input voltage is 22 kV and NS 550 1
the output voltage is 550 V. The ratio of the number of = =
N P 22000 40
turns in the secondary to that in the primary is
(a) 1 : 20
(b) 20 : 1
(c) 1 : 40
(d) 40 : 1
8c Consider the situation shown. The wire AB is sliding on Conceptual
fixed rails with a constant velocity. If the wire AB is
replaced by semi-circular wire, the magnitude of induced
emf will
74
(a) Increase
(b) Decrease
(c) Remain the same
(d) Increase or decrease depending on whether the
semi-circular buldges towards the resistance or
away from it
9c A magnet is moving towards a coil along its axis and the The relative velocity of approach equals 2v and hence
emf induced in the coil is ε. If the coil also starts moving the induced emf becomes 2ε.
towards the magnet with the same speed, the induced
emf will be

(a)
2
(b) ε
(c) 2ε
(d) 4ε
10b Which one of the following curves represents variation of Conceptual

current (I) with frequency (f) in series LCR circuit
11d To induce an emf in a coil, the linking magnetic flux The flux linked with the circuit must either decrease or
(a) Must decrease increase. Actually it must change.
(b) Must increase
(c) Must remain constant
(d) Can either increase or decrease
12c An ideal transformer is used to step up and alternating P 6.6 x103
emf of 220 V to 4.4 kV to transmit 6.6 kW of power. The IP = =
P 220
current rating of the secondary is
(a) 30 A  IP = 30 A
(b) 3 A Since
(c) 1.5 A
(d) 1 A
74
IS P
=
I P S
 P 
 IS =   IP

 S
220
 IS = x30
4400
 IS = 1.5 A
13a The tuning circuit of a radio receiver has a resistance of 1
50 Ω, an inductor of 10 mH and a variable capacitor. A 1 0 =
LC
MHz radio wave produces a potential difference of 0.1
1
mV. The value of the capacitor to produce resonance is  f0 =
(Take π2 = 10) 2 LC
(a) 2.5 pF 1
(b) 5.0 pF
 106 =
2 10 −2 C
(c) 25 pF
1
(d) 50 pF  1012 =
4(10)(10−2 C )
 C = 2.5 x 10-12 F
 C = 2.5 pF
14c In PROBLEM 13, the current at resonance is At resonance
(a) 1 µA E0 0.1x10−3
(b) 1.5 µA I= =
R 50
(c) 2 µA
 I = 2 x 10-6 A
(d) 4 µA
 I = 2 µA
15d In a transformer, the number of turns in the primary an S NS
= =3
secondary coils are 1000 and 3000 respectively. If the P NP
primary is connected across 80 V A.C., the potential
difference across each turn of the secondary will be   S = 3(80) = 240 V
(a) 240 V 240
Hence potential across each turn of secondary is
(b) 0.24 V 3000
(c) 0.8 V = 0.08 V/turn
(d) 0.08 V
16a A coil is rotated in a uniform magnetic field about an axis Conceptual
perpendicular to the field. The emf induced in the coil
would be maximum when the plane of the coil is
(a) Parallel to the field
(b) Perpendicular to the field
(c) At 450 to the field
(d) In none of the above positions
17b According to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction A and C are statements of Lenz’s Law. B is the correct
(a) The direction of induced current is such that it option.
opposes the cause producing it.
(b) The magnitude of induced emf produced in a coil
is directly proportional to the rate of change of
magnetic flux
(c) The direction of induced emf is such that it
opposes the cause producing it.
74
(d) None of the above
18a A coil of area 10 cm2, 10 turns and resistance 20 Ω is 
placed in a magnetic field directed perpendicular to the I = R
plane of the coil and changing at the rate of 108
1  B 
gauses/second. The induced current in the coil will be  I= NA  
(a) 5 A R  t 
(b) 0.5 A 1  10  4
 I= (10)  10
(c) 0.05 A 20  10000 
(d) 50 A  I=5A
19d Which one of the following represents the variation of 1 1
capacitance reactance (XC) with the frequency (v) of the XC = C = 2 vC
voltage source?  XC v = constant
Which indicates a graph for rectangular hyperbola.
20b Capacitor C1 of capacitance 1 µF and capacitor C2 of 1

capacitance 2 µF are separately charged fully by a q = q0 e RC
common battery. The two capacitors are then separated 1

allowed to discharge through equal resistors at time t = 0 RC
(a) The current in each of the two discharging  q = (CV0) e
1
circuits is zero at t = 0 dq CV0 RC
(b) The currents in the two discharging circuits at t = I= =− e
0 are equal but not zero
dt RC
V
(c) The currents in the two discharging circuits at t = I(t = 0) = − 0
0 are unequal R
(d) The capacitors C1 and C2 lose their 50% charge in Which we observe is independent of the capacitance
same duration and only depends upon resistance.
21c An LCR series circuit contains L = 8 H, C = 0.5 µF and R = 1

100 Ω. The resonant frequency of the circuit is f0 =
2 LC
1000
(a) Hz 1
  f0 =
500 2 8(0.5 x10−6 )
(b) Hz
  f0 =
1000 250
= Hz
250 4 
(c) Hz

74
125
(d) Hz

22b An emf of 15 V is applied in a circuit containing 5 H L 5 1
inductance and 10 Ω resistance. The ratio of the currents = =
R 10 2
at time t =  and at t = 1 s is
 Rt

Since I = I0  1 − e L 
1/2
e
(a)
e 1/2
−1  
e 2 I(t =  ) = I1 = I0
(b) I(t = 1) = I2 = I0(1 – e-2)
e2 − 1
I1 I0
(c) 1 – e-1  =
(d) e-1 I 2 I 0 (1 − e −2 )
I1 e2
 =
I 2 e2 − 1
23c In a circuit given in figure 1 and 2 are ammeters. Just Capacitor is a dc blocking element and hence no
after key K is pressed to complete the circuit, the reading current flows in (1).
is An inductor offers a zero resistance path to flow of dc
and hence maximum current flows through (2).
(a) Zero in both 1 and 2

(b) Maximum in both 1 and 2
(c) Zero in 1 and maximum in 2
(d) Maximum in 1 and zero in 2
24b In a dc motor, if E is the applied emf and e is the back Conceptual
emf, then the efficiency is
E −e
(a)
E
e
(b)
E
 E −e
2
(c)  
 E 
2
e
(d)  
E
25b A conducting rod of length l is falling with a velocity v Conceptual

perpendicular to a uniform horizontal magnetic field B.
74
The potential difference between its two ends will be
(a) 2 Blv
(b) Blv
Blv
(c)
2
(d) B2l2v2
26a,b,c A rectangular coil is placed in a region having a uniform Conceptual
magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the coil. An
emf be induced in the coil if the
(a) Magnetic field is increased uniformly

(b) Magnetic field is switched off.
(c) Coil is rotated about the axis XX’
(d) Coil is rotated about an axis perpendicular to the
plane of the coil and passing through its centre O.
27a,c,d Two different coils have self-inductances L1 = 8 mH, L2 = 2 P = Vi
mH. The current in one coil is increased at a constant di
rate. The current in the second coil is also increased at
 P = Li
dt
the same constant rate. At a certain instant of time, the  L1i1 = L2i2
power given to the two coils is the same. At that time the i1 L2 1
current, the induced voltage and the energy stored in the  = =
first coil are i1, V1 and W1 respectively. Corresponding i2 L1 4
values for the second coil at the same instant are i2, V2
and W2 respectively. Then
i1 1
(a) =
i2 4
i
(b) 1 = 4
i2
W2
(c) =4
W1
V2 1
(d) =
V1 4
28b A coil is wound on a frame of rectangular cross-section. If L = µ0n2Al
all the linear dimensions of the frame are increased by a If all the dimensions of the frame are increased by a
factor 2 and the number of turns per unit length of the factor of 2, then area is increased by a factor of 4 and
coil remains the same, self-inductance of the coil length by a factor of 2.
increases by a factor of Hence L becomes 8L.
(a) 4
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 16
29b A metal rod moves at a constant velocity in a direction An induced emf is set up across the ends of the rod and
74
perpendicular to its length. A constant uniform magnetic hence an electric field is set up in the rod.
field exists in space in a direction perpendicular to the
rod as well its velocity. Select to correct statement(s)
from the following
(a) The entire rod is at the same potential
(b) There is an electric field in the rod
(c) The electric potential is highest at the centre
(d) The electric potential is lowest at its centre and
increases towards its ends
30c Two coils of inductances L1 and L2 are placed so close Conceptual
together that the same flux is linked with both. The
mutual inductance of the pair is
(a) L1 L2
(b) (L1 L2)2
(c) L1 L2
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

1c An observer moves towards a plane mirror with a speed If the mirror approaches the object or the object
of 2 ms-1. The speed of the image with respect to the approaches the stationary mirror with speed v then
observer is image approaches object with speed 2v.
(a) 1 ms-1
(b) 2 ms-1
(c) 4 ms-1
(d) 8 ms-1
2d A plane mirror is approaching you at 10 cms-1. You can Conceptual
see your image in it. The image will approach you with a
speed
(a) 5 cms-1
(b) 10 cms-1
(c) 15 cms-1
(d) 20 cms-1
3b A plane mirror reflects a beam of light to form a real A divergent beam appears to converge behind the
image. The incident beam is mirror thus giving a virtual image. So, a convergent
(a) Parallel beam will give a real image.
(b) Convergent
(c) Divergent
(d) Any one of the above
4b A man of height 1.6 m wishes to see his full image in a The minimum length of the mirror required for the
plane mirror placed at a distance of 2 m. The minimum purpose is half the height of the person
length of the mirror should be
(a) 0.4 m
(b) 0.8 m
(c) 1.6 m
(d) 2.4 m
74
5c A boy of height 1.5 m with his eye level at 1.4 m stands Conceptual
before a plane mirror of length 0.75 m fixed on the well.
The height of the lower edge of the mirror above the
floor is 0.8 m. Then
(a) The boy will see his full image
(b) The boy cannot see his hair
(c) The boy cannot see his feet
(d) The boy cannot see both his hair and feet
6b Two plane mirrors are placed perpendicular to each Ray’s after reflections from two perpendicular mirrors
other. A ray strikes one mirror and after reflection falls on are always parallel to incident ray irrespective of angle
the second mirror. The ray after reflection from the of incidence.
second mirror will be
(a) Perpendicular to the original ray
(b) Parallel to the original ray
(c) At 450 to the original ray
(d) Can be at any angle to the original ray
7a A bulb is placed between two plane mirrors inclined at an 360

angle of 600. The number of images formed is = 6 which is Even

(a) 5 360
(b) 6  n= −1 = 5
(c) 4

(d) 3
8d An object is placed between two parallel mirrors. The 360
number of images formed is n= →
0
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 8
(d) Infinite
9c A man stands in a room with his eyes at the centre of the
room. The height of the ceiling is H. The length of the
shortest plane mirror, fixed on the wall in front of the
man, so that the man can see the full image of the wall
behind him is
2H
(a)
3
H
(b)
2 From symmetry we observe that length of mirror is one
H third of height of wall.
(c) H
3  =
H 3
(d)
4
74
10b Two plane mirrors are inclined at 700. A ray incident on
one mirror at angle θ, after reflection falls on the second
mirror and is reflected from there parallel to the first
mirror. θ is
(a) 450
(b) 500
(c) 550
(d) 600
11b A number of images of a candle flame are seen in a thick This happens due to multiple refractions and
mirror reflections. The first image is formed due to reflection
(a) The first image is the brightest at X1Y1 and is fainter. The second image is formed due
(b) The second image is the brightest to reflection at X2Y2 and is brightest all other images
(c) The last image is the brightest formed further are faint.
(d) All images are equally bright
12a When a ray of light enters a glass slab from air According to Snell’s Law
(a) Its wavelength decreases µλ = constant
(b) Its wavelength increases  µaλa = µgλg
(c) Its frequency increases a a
(d) Neither its wavelength nor its frequency changes  g =
g
 λg < λ a
13a A monochromatic beam of light passes from a denser to a According to Snell’s Law
rarer medium. As a result its µv = constant
(a) Velocity increases
(b) Velocity decreases
(c) Frequency decreases
(d) Frequency increases
14c When light passes from one medium to another, the Conceptual
physical quantity that remains unchanged is
(a) Velocity
(b) Wavelength
(c) Frequency
(d) None of these
15c A well cut diamond appears bright because Conceptual
(a) It emits light
(b) It is radioactive
(c) Of total internal reflection
(d) Of dispersion
16b The refractive index of a given piece of transparent quartz According to Snell’s Law
74
is greatest for µλ = constant
(a) Red light Since λRed > λViolet
(b) Violet light  µRed < µViolet
(c) Green light
(d) Yellow light
17a Total internal reflection can occur when light tends to Conceptual
pass from
(a) A denser to a rarer medium
(b) A rarer to a denser medium
(c) One medium to another of different refractive
index irrespective of which medium has greater
refractive index
(d) One medium to another of equal refractive index
18b Mirage is observed in a desert due to the phenomenon of Conceptual
(a) Interference
(b) Total internal reflection
(c) Scattering
(d) Double refraction
19d Critical angle of light passing from a glass to water is Cλ
minimum for Since λRed > λViolet
(a) Red colour  CRed > CViolet
(b) Green colour
(c) Yellow colour
(d) Violet colour
20c A diver in a lake wants to signal his distress to a person Since light has to travel from denser to raser medium
sitting on the edge of the lake flashing his water proof so, it must be made incident in the denser medium at
torch. He should direct the beam an angle less than critical angle.
(a) Vertically upwards
(b) Horizontally
(c) At an angle to the vertical which is slightly less
than the critical angle
(d) At an angle to the vertical which is slightly more
than the critical angle
21c 3 Since
Glass has refractive index and water has refractive µv = constant
2
4  µgvg = µwvw
index . If the speed of light in glass is 2.00 x 108 ms-1, 3 4
3  (2 x108 ) = vw
the speed of light in water in ms-1 is 2 3
(a) 1.50 x 108  vw = 2.25 x 108 ms-1
(b) 1.78 x 108
(c) 2.25 x 108
(d) 2.67 x 108
22a The critical angle of light going from medium A into
 vdenser
medium B is θ. The speed of light in medium A is v. The rarer
=
speed of light in medium B is Sin C =
 denser
v rarer
v
(a) vdenser v A
sin  =
(b) v sin θ  sin θ =
vrarer vB
74
v v
(c)  sin θ =
tan  vB
(d) v tan θ v
 vB =
sin 
23d A ray of light travelling inside a rectangular glass block of 1
Sin C =
refractive index 2 is incident on the glass-air surface at 2
an angle of incidence of 450. The refractive index of air is  C = 450
1. The ray will For i = C in denser medium angle of refraction in rarer
(a) Emerge into air without any deviation medium is 900.
(b) Be reflected back into glass
(c) Be absorbed
(d) Emerge into air with an angle of refraction equal
to 900.
24c The speed of light in glass of refractive index 1.5 is 2 x 108 According to Snell’s Law
ms-1. In a certain liquid the speed of light is 2.5 x 108 ms-1. µv = constant
The refractive index of the liquid is  µgvg = µlvl
(a) 0.64  (1.5) x (2 x 108) = µl(2.5 x 108)
(b) 0.80 3 30
(c) 1.20  µl = = = 1.2
2.5 25
(d) 1.44
25b The speed of light in medium A is 2.0 x 108 ms-1 and that  rarer  B
in medium B is 2.4 x 108 ms-1. The critical angle of =
incidence for light tending to go from medium A to Sin C =
 denser  A
medium B is
Since µAvA = µBvB
-1  5 vA 2
(a) Sin  
 12   sin C = =
vB 2.4
5 5
(b) Sin-1  
6  sin C =
6
2
(c) Sin-1  
3
3
(d) Sin-1  
4
26c 4 rarer w
If the refractive index of water is
3
and that of glass is
=
5
Sin C =
denser  g
, then the critical angle of incidence for light tending to
3 4/3 4
go from glass to water is
 sin C = =
5/3 5
3
(a) Sin-1  
4
3
(b) Sin-1  
5
4
(c) Sin-1  
5
74
2
(d) Sin-1  
3
27a A diver inside water sees the setting sun at For the diver
(a) 410 to the horizon 1 1
(b) 490 to the horizon Sin C = =
w (4 / 3)
(c) 00 to the horizon
 4
 Re member that  water = 
(d) 450 to the horizon
 3
 C = 49 with vertical
0
 θ = 90 – 490 = 410 with the horizon.

28c A fish looking up through the water sees the outside To a fish the outer world is seen in a circle of radius
world contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive d
, d is the depth at which the fish swims.
4  2
− 1
index of water is and the fish is 12 cm below the
3
12
surface of water, the radius of the circle in cm is  r=
16
(a) 36 5 −1
9
(b) 36 7
36
36  r= cm
(c) 7
7
(d) 4 5
29c Light travels through a glass plate of thickness t and Optical path length = nt
having refractive index n. if c is the velocity of light in nt
vacuum, the time taken by light to travel this thickness of So time taken =
c
glass is
t
(a)
nc
t
(b)
n2c
nt
(c)
c
n 2t
(d)
c
30a, b A ray of light from a denser medium strikes a rarer rarer r
medium at angle of incidence i. The reflected and the =
refracted rays make an angle of 900 with each other. The
Sin C =
denser d
angles of reflection and refraction are r and r’ I + r’ = 900
respectively. The critical angle is According to Snell’s Law
(a) Sin-1(tan r) µd sin i = µr sin (r’)
(b) Sin-1(tan i) sin i 
(c) Sin-1(tan r’)  = r = sin C
(d) Tan-1(sin i) sin( r ')  d
sin i
 = sin C
sin(90 − i )
 sin C = tan i
 C = sin-1(tan i)
 C = sin-1(tan r) {Because i = r}
74
WAVE OPTICS
1c A person standing at a distance of 3.6 km can just resolve
two poles. The distance between the poles is
(a) 0.1 m
(b) 100 m
(c) 1 m
(d) 10 m If x is the distance between poles and D is the distance
of the eye from the poles as shown in figure we have
x
dθ = tandθ = . Here D = 3.6 km = 3600 m and dθ =
D
1
radian. Hence x = 1 m.
3600
2b In an interference pattern produced by two identical slits, Imax = I = (a + a)2
the intensity at the site of the central maximum is I. The  I = 4a2 = 4I0
intensity at the same spot when either of two slits is When either of the two slits is covered then
closed is I
I I’ = (a + 0)2 = a2 =
(a) 4
2
I
(b)
4
I
(c)
2 2
I
(d)
2
3d Which of the following has the longest wavelength? Conceptual
(a) Blue light
(b) Gamma ray
(c) X – ray
(d) Red light
4a Atomic spectrum should be The energy levels of atoms are well defined. Hence
(a) Pure emission line spectrum transition between them should give a well defined
(b) Emission band spectrum frequency, which means a single frequency, and hence
(c) Absorption line spectrum a single line.
(d) Absorption band spectrum
5d Finger prints of a piece of paper may be detected by Ultraviolet radiations, when fall on a fluorescent
sprinkling fluorescent powder on the paper and than material, are converted into visible radiations. Hence
looking into it under we should use ultraviolet radiation.
(a) Yellow light
74
(b) Brightness
(c) Infrared light
(d) Ultraviolet light
6a Young’s experiment establishes that Conceptual
(a) Light consists of waves
(b) Light consists of particles
(c) Light is neither particle nor wave
(d) Light is both particle and wave
7a In Young’s double-slit experiment the separation D
between the slits is doubled and the distance between  = and
d
the slit and the screen is halved. The fringe-width  ( D / 2) 
becomes '= =
(a) One – fourth
2 d 4
(b) Half
(c) Double
(d) Quadruple
8a In Young’s experiment, using red and blue lights of (n + 1)5200 = n(7800)
0 0  n=2
wavelengths 7800  and 5200  respectively, the value
of n for which nth red fringe coincides with (n + 1)th blue
fringe is
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
9b A point source emits light equally in all directions. Two The intensity of light received is inversely proportional
points P and Q are at distances 9 m and 25 m respectively to the square of distance. Hence the amplitude of the
from the source. The ratio of the amplitudes of the waves light wave received is inversely proportional to the
P and Q is distance.
(a) 9 : 25
(b) 25 : 9
(c) 92 : 252
(d) 252 : 92
10a When light is incident on a transparent surface at the Conceptual
polarizing angle, which of the following is completely
polarized?
(a) Reflected light
(b) Refracted light
(c) Both reflected as well as refracted light
(d) Neither reflected nor refracted light
11b A grating has 5000 lines/cm. The maximum order visible The relation among angle of diffraction θ, order n and
0 number of lines per cm of the grating N is sin θ = Nnλ.
with wavelength 6000  The maximum value of sin θ = 1. Hence maximum value
(a) 2
1
(b) 3 for n = . λ = 6000 x 10-8 cm, N = 5000 lines/cm, we
(c) 4 N 
(d) 0 get n = 3.33. The order of spectrum is an integer. Thus
we cannot see the fourth order, but can see the third
order.
12a, c White light is used to illuminate the two slits in a Young’s
X = path difference = b + d − d
2 2
double-slit experiment. The separation between the slits
74
is b and the screen is at a distance d(>> b) from the slits.  b2 
At a point on the screen directly in front of one of the  x = d  1 + 2 − 1
slits, certain wavelengths are missing. Some of these  d 
missing wavelengths are  2

b
b2  x = d 1 + − 1 
(a)  =
2
 2d 
d
2b 2
(b)  =  b2 b2 b 2 
d sin ce 2  1, Hence 1 + 2 = 1 + 2 
b2  d d 2d 
(c)  =
3d b2
 x=
2b 2 2d
(d)  = For wavelength to be missing we must find positions of
3d
minima.

At minima path difference is an odd multiple of
2
b 2

 x= = (2n + 1) ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3,……..
2d 2
2
b
 = ; n = 0, 1, 2,…….
(2n + 1)d
b2 b2 b2
  = , , ,............
d 3d 5d
13a Diffraction pattern of a single slit consists of a central Conceptual
bright band which is
(a) Wide, and is flanked by alternate dark and bright
bands of decreasing intensity
(b) Narrow, and is flanked by alternate dark and
bright bands of equal intensity
(c) Wide, and is flanked by alternate dark and bright
bands of equal intensity
(d) Narrow, and is flanked by alternate dark and
bright bands of decreasing intensity
14d A nicol prism is based on the action of The action of a nicol prism is based on double
(a) Refraction refraction and dichroism. When a ray of light enters
(b) Double refraction into a calcite crystal, it is split into two rays O and E.
(c) Dichroism Both are plane polarized in mutually perpendicular
(d) Both (b) and (c) planes. One of them suffers total reflection and
absorption while the other comes out as plane
polarized. Selective absorption is called dichroism.
74
15b Energies of photons of four different electromagnetic We take one wavelength in the visible region and
radiations are given below. The energy value corresponds calculate the energy just to know its order. Let us take
to a visible photon is equal to 0
(a) 1 eV 6000  (red) for convenience of a rough calculation.

(b) 2 eV hc
Energy E = . Taking h = 6.6 x 10-34, c = 3 x 108, λ =
(c) 5 eV 
(d) 1000 eV hc
6000 x 10-10 m we get in joules. Dividing this by 1.6

x 10-19 to convert to eV, we get E = 2 eV. For energy 1
0
eV, wavelength will be 12000  . Energy 5 eV means
0
2
wavelength of 6000, that is 2400  . Both these are
5
invisible, recalling that the visible range is 4000 to 7000
0

16b Which of the following cannot be polarized? Only transverse waves can be polarized. (A) and (C) and
(a) Radio waves (D) are electromagnetic radiations, which are
(b) β rays transverse waves while (B), that is, β rays are electrons.
(c) Infrared rays
(d) γ rays
17d At sunrise or at sunset the sun appears to be reddish During sunset and sunrise we see the unscattered part
while at mid-day the sun looks white. The reason is that of the sunlight. Sun’s rays have to travel long distance
(a) The sun is less hot at sunrise or at sunset that at and hence are incident obliquely. All shorter
noon wavelengths are scattered by Rayleigh’s law for
(b) Diffraction sends red rays to the earth at these 1
scattered intensity I  . Only the red orange rays
time 4
(c) Refraction is responsible for this effect reach us. During noon the sun’s rays are normally
(d) Scattering due to dust particles and air molecules incident on the earth. Hence a portion of both the
shorter wavelengths and longer wavelengths reach us.
The sun looks white.
18d Plane polarized light is passed through a Polaroid. On Since, according to Malus Law
viewing through the Polaroid we find that when the I = I0cos2φ
Polaroid is given one complete rotation about the
direction of light
(a) The intensity of light gradually decreases to zero
and remains at zero
(b) The intensity of light gradually increases to a
maximum and remains maximum
(c) There is no change in the intensity of light
(d) The intensity of light varies such that it is twice
maximum and twice zero
19c A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate at Conceptual
an angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s angle φ. If µ
represents the refractive index of glass with respect to
air, then the angle between reflected and refracted rays
is
(a) 900 + φ
(b) Sin-1(µ cos φ)
(c) 900
74
 sin  
(d) 900 – sin-1  
  
20c A green book viewed through a red glass will appear A red glass will transmit only red rays through it. Green
(a) Magenta light will not pass through it. Hence the book cannot be
(b) Red seen. It will appear black.
(c) Black
(d) Green
21c In order that a thin film of oil floating on the surface of For observation of colours, the thickness of the film
water shows colours due to interference, the thickness of should be of the order of the wavelength of visible
the oil film should be of the order of light.
(a) 1 cm
0
(b) 10 
0
(c) 5000 
0
(d) 10000 
22b If two slightly different wavelengths are present in the Conceptual
light used in Young’s double-slit experiment, then
(a) The sharpness of fringes will be more than the
case when only one wavelength is present
(b) The sharpness of fringes will decrease as we
move away from the centre fringe
(c) The central fringe will be white
(d) The central fringe will be dark
23b The resolution of the human eye is 1’. The resolving 1
The resolving power of the human eye is is the
power of the human eye is nearly d
(a) 360 smallest angle subtended by two objects just
(b) 3600 1
(c) 36000 distinguishable, dθ = 1’ = . Converting this into
(d) 360000
600
radian and taking 1 radian as nearly 600 (Actually 570
18’) we get the resolving power as 3600.
24d Two waves originating from sources S1 and S2 having zero For destructive interference, path difference must be
phase difference and common wavelength λ will show 
completely destructive interference at a point P if S1P – an odd multiple of 2 .
S2P is
(a) 5λ
3
(b)
4
(c) 2λ
11
(d)
2
25c Ray optics is valid when characteristic dimensions are Conceptual
(a) Of the same order as the wavelength of light
(b) Much smaller than the wavelength of light
(c) Much larger than the wavelength of light
(d) Of the order of 1 mm
26a At sunset, the sun seems to be This is the effect of refraction. Rays from the sun are
(a) Higher than it really is passing from vacuum to air when they enter into the
74
(b) Lower than it really is earth’s atmosphere. They bend towards the normal
(c) Exactly where it really is making the sun to appear at a higher altitude as shown
(d) Lower than it would be at sunrise in figure.
27c Interference fringes were produced in Young’s double-slit D

0 Shift, x = (  − 1) t 
experiment using light of wavelength 5000  . When a d
film of thickness 2.5 x 10-3 cm was placed in front of one tD
 20β = (µ - 1)
of the slits, the fringe pattern shifted by a distance equal d
to 20 fringe - width. The refractive index of the material  D  tD
of the film is  20   = (  − 1)
 d  d
(a) 1.25
 20λ = (µ - 1)t
(b) 1.35
20
(c) 1.4  = +1
(d) 1.5 t
20 x5000 x10−10
 = +1
2.5 x10−5
4
  = +1
10
 µ = 1.4
28d The blue colour of the sky is explained by Blue of the sky is explained by scattering. Scattered
(a) Refraction 1
light boys Rayleigh’s law. I  . Hence shorter
(b) Reflection 4
(c) Polarization wavelengths are scattered with more intensity. In
(d) Scattering visible light, violet and blue have the minimum
wavelength. Of the two, blue is more intense.
29c A slit of width a is illuminated by red light of wavelength For first minimum
0 λ = a sin θ
6500  . The first minimum will fall at θ = 300 if a is  6.5 x 10-7 = a sin 30

0
(a) 3250  a = 13 x 10-7 m
(b) 6.5 x 10-4 mm  a = 1.3 µm
(c) 1.3 µm
(d) 2.6 x 10-4 cm
30c In Huygens’ wave theory, the locus of all the points in the Conceptual
same state of vibration is called a
(a) Half period zone
(b) Vibrator
(c) Wavefront
(d) Ray
74
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES & COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLES
1c The ozone layer of atmosphere absorbs
(a) Visible radiations
(b) Infrared radiations
(c) Ultraviolet radiations
(d) Radiowaves
2a Which of the following has the shortest wavelength
(a) X – rays
(b) Microwaves
(c) Ultraviolet rays
(d) Radiowaves
3d In an electromagnetic wave
(a) Power is transmitted along the magnetic field
(b) Power is transmitted along the electric field
(c) Power is equally transferred along the electric
and magnetic fields
(d) Power is transmitted in a direction perpendicular
to both the fields
4d Waves used for telecommunication are
(a) Visible light
(b) Infrared
(c) Ultraviolet
(d) Microwaves
5c Which of the following radiations form part of the
electromagnetic spectrum?
(a) Alpha rays
(b) Beta rays
(c) Gamma rays
(d) Cathode rays
6a,c,d Electromagnetic waves
(a) Travel in free space at the speed of light
(b) Travel with the same speed in all media
(c) Are transverse
(d) Are produced by an accelerating charge
7a Electromagnetic waves are
(a) Transverse
(b) Longitudinal
(c) May be longitudinal or transverse
(d) Neither longitudinal nor transverse
8d In vacuum the speed of electromagnetic waves depends
upon
(a) Wavelength
(b) Frequency
(c) Electric and magnetic field
(d) None of these
9a The ozone layer absorbs radiation of wavelengths
(a) Less than 3 x 10-7 m
(b) More than 3 x 10-7 m
74
(c) Less than 3 x 10-5 m
(d) More than 3 x 10-5 m
10c Electromagnetic waves are produced by
(a) Charges at rest only
(b) Charges in uniform motion only
(c) Accelerated or decelerated charges only
(d) All of the above
11a The range of microwaves is
(a) 1 mm – 3 cm
(b) 3 cm – 1 m
(c) 1 m – 300 m
(d) All of above
12d Ultra High Frequency (UHF) band stands for
(a) 0 – 300 kHz
(b) 3 – 30 MHz
(c) 300 – 3000 kHz
(d) 300 – 3000 MHz
13c A wave is propagating in a medium of electric dielectric
constant 2 and relative magnetic permeability 50. The
wave impedance of such a medium is
(a) 5 Ω
(b) 376.6 Ω
(c) 1883 Ω
(d) 3776 Ω
14c Medium Frequency band (MF band) stands for
(a) 0 – 300 kcs-1
(b) 3 – 30 MHz
(c) 300 – 3000 kHz
(d) 300 – 3000 MHz
15a The wavelength 21 cm emitted by atomic hydrogen in
interstellar space belongs to
(a) Radiowaves
(b) Infraredwaves
(c) Microwaves
(d) γ – rays
16a The ionosphere
(a) Reflects back radiowaves in the AM band
(b) Reflects back radiowaves in the FM band
(c) Absorbs radiowaves in the AM band
(d) Absorbs radiowaves in the FM band
17d A radar beam consists of
(a) X – rays
(b) Infra red rays
(d) Microwaves
18d The scientist who first produced and observed the
electromagnetic waves was
(a) Maxwell
(b) J.C. Bose
(c) Marconi
74
(d) Hertz
19c The frequency modulated waves are
(a) Reflected by atmosphere
(b) Absorbed by atmosphere
(c) Bend by atmosphere
(d) Radiowaves
20b To which region of electromagnetic spectrum, the
frequency 1 BHz correspond?
(a) Ultraviolet rays
(b) Radiowaves
(c) Visible radiation
(d) X – rays
21d The ozone layer absorbs
(a) Infrared radiation
(b) Microwaves
(c) Radiowaves
(d) Ultraviolet radiation
22b The first Indian Scientist who experimentally confirmed
the existence of electromagnetic waves is
(a) Sir C.V. Raman
(b) J.C. Bose
(c) M.N. Saha
(d) Hertz
23c Which of the following waves are relevant to
telecommunication
(a) Ultraviolet
(b) Infrared
(c) Microwaves
(d) Visible light
24c An LC resonant circuit contains a 400 pF capacitor and a
100 µH inductor. It is sent into oscillations coupled to an
antenna. The wavelength of the radiated electromagnetic
wave is
(a) 377 mm
(b) 377 cm
(c) 377 m
(d) 3.77 cm
25b In the absence of atmosphere around the earth, the
average surface temperature of earth
(a) Will increase
(b) Will decrease
(c) Will remain unchanged
(d) Cannot be decided
26c The relation between electric field E and magnetic field H
in an electromagnetic wave is
(a) E = H
0
(b) E = H
0
74
0
(c) E= H
0
0
(d) E = H
0
27a The ratio of electric filed vector E and magnetic field
E
vector H i.e.,   has the dimensions of
H
(a) Resistance
(b) Inductance
(c) Capacitance
(d) Product of inductance and capacitance
28b In an electromagnetic wave, the direction of the
magnetic field induction B is
(a) Parallel to electric field E
(b) Perpendicular to electric field E
(c) Antiparallel to Pointing vector S
(d) Random
29b The wave associated with 2.7 K belongs to

(a) Radiowaves
(b) Microwaves
(d) Infrared waves
30c A parallel plate capacitor consists of two circular plates

each of radius 2 cm, separated by a distance of 0.1 mm. If
voltage across the plates is varying at the rate of 5 x 1013
Vs-1, then the value of displacement current is
(a) 5.50 A
(b) 5.56 x 102 A
(c) 5.56 x 103 A
(d) 2.28 x 104 A
ELECTRONS & PHOTONS

1a In photoelectric emission the number of electrons Conceptual
74
ejected per second is proportional to the
(a) Intensity of light
(b) Wavelength of light
(c) Frequency of light
(d) Work function of the material
2b If the specific charge of a person is 9.6 x 107 Ckg-1, that of q 2q
an α – particle is S = = P
m 4mP
(a) 2.4 x 107 Ckg-1
1 qP 1
(b) 4.8 x 107 Ckg-1  S = = (9.6 x107 )
(c) 19.2 x 107 Ckg-1 2 mP 2
(d) 38.4 x 107 Ckg-1  Sα = 4.8 x 107 Ckg-1
3b The de-Broglie wavelength of a molecule of thermal 1 2
energy kBT (kB = Boltzmann constant and T = absolute mv = kBT
2
temperature), is
2kBT
h V=
(a)  = m
2mk BT
h
h  =
(b) 2mk BT
2mk BT
(c) h 2mk BT
h
(d)
4m k B2T 2
2
4b Figure represents the graph of photo current i versus Stopping potential is 4 V. So, maximum K.E. is 4 eV.
applied voltage (V). The maximum energy of the emitted
photoelectrons is
(a) 2 eV
(b) 4 eV
(c) 0 eV
(d) 4 J
5c The maximum velocity of an electron emitted by light of hv = EK + φ
wavelength λ incident on the surface of a metal of work- 1
function φ is  hv – φ = mv2
2
2(hc +  ) 2(hv −  )
(a)
m  v=
m
2(hc −  )
(b) 2(hc −  )
m  v=
m
2(hc −  )
(c)
m
74
2(h −  )
(d)
m
Where h = Planck’s constant, m = mass of electron and c
= speed of light
6b The potential difference between the cathode and anode 1 2
in a cathode ray tube is V. Then the speed acquired by mv = eV
2
the electrons is proportional to
2 eV
(a) V  v=
(b) V m
2
(c) V
(d) V3/2
7b The stopping potential (V0) versus frequency plot of a V0 = 5 x 1014 Hz
substance is shown in figure the threshold wavelength is Since
C = v0λ
3 x108
 =
5 x1014
0
  = 6000 
(a) 5 x 1014 m
0
(b) 6000 
0
(c) 5000 
(d) Can not be estimated from given data
8a Boron has two isotopes 5B10 and 5B11. If the atomic weight N1 A1 + N 2 A2
of boron is 10.81, the ratio of 5B10 and 5B11 in nature is A=
N1 + N 2
19
(a) N (10) + N 2 (11)
81  10.81 = 1
N1 + N 2
20
(b) Solving, we get
53
N1 0.19 19
15 = =
(c) N 2 0.81 81
10
10
(d)
11
9c de Broglie waves are associated with Conceptual
(a) Moving charged particles only
(b) Moving neutral particles only
(c) All moving particles
(d) All particles whether in motion or at rest
10c Einstein’s photoelectric equation is EK = hv – φ. In this Conceptual
equation EK refers to
(a) Kinetic energy of all the emitted electrons
(b) Mean kinetic energy of emitted electrons
(c) Maximum kinetic energy of emitted electrons
(d) Minimum kinetic energy of emitted electrons
74
11d The maximum kinetic energy (EK) of photoelectrons varies EK = hv – hv0
with the frequency (v) of the incident radiation as EK  y, v  x, hv0 = constant (k)
 y = hx – k (Equation of a straight line)
12c, d The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission 0

0 Infrared light has wavelength greater than 5200  and
from a material is 5200  . Photoelectrons will be 0
emitted when this material is illuminated with UV has λ < 5200  . So UV lamp will be able to get the
monochromatic radiation from a photoelectrons emitted by a surface irrespective of
(a) 50 watt infrared lamp intensity.
(b) 1 watt infrared lamp
(c) 50 watt ultraviolet lamp
(d) 1 watt ultraviolet lamp
13a Hydrogen has three isotopes 1H1, 1H2, 1H3. If a beam Number of parabolas in Thomson experiment =
containing mixture of these isotopes is allowed to enter Number of isotopes.
along X – axis in simultaneous electric and magnetic fields
along Y – axis. Then on a fluorescent screen, we will
observe
(a) Three parabolas
(b) Three straight lines
(c) Three ellipses
(d) Three circles
14d The maximum kinetic energy (Emax) of photoelectrons EK = hv – hv0
emitted in a photoelectric cell varies with frequency (v) as Is the equation of a straight line with slope h.
shown in the graph. The slope of the graph is equal to
(a) Charge of the electron

e
(b) of the electron
m
(c) Work function of the emitter
(d) Planck’s constant
15b An electron at rest is accelerated through a potential 1 2
difference of 200 V. If the specific charge of the electron mv = eV
2
is 1.76 x 1011 Ckg-1, the velocity acquired by the electron
is
74
(a) 8.4 x 105 ms-1 2 eV
(b) 8.4 x 106 ms-1  v=
(c) 4.2 x 105 ms-1 m
(d) 4.2 x 106 ms-1  v = 8.4 x 106 ms-1
16b The ratio of the specific charge of the electron to that of e / me mH
the hydrogen ion is = = 1840
e / mH me
(a) 1 : 1
(b) 1840 : 1
(c) 1 : 1840
17d In a photoemissive cell with exciting wavelength λ, the1 2 hc
mv = −W …(1)
fastest electron has a speed v. If the exciting wavelength
2 
3
is changed to , the speed of the fastest emitted 1 mv’2 = hc − W …(2)
4 2 3 / 4
electrons will be 4hc
−W
3  v '  3
(a) v Dividing,   =
4  v  hc − W
4 
(b) v
3 4
v'  v
4 3
(c) Less than v
3
4
(d) Greater than v
3
18b In photoelectric effect, the graph showing the variation of hv = hv0 + eV0
cut-off voltage (V0) with the frequency of incident  eV0 = hv – hv0
radiation (v) is h h
 V0 = v − v0
e e
Which is again equation of a straight line with slope
h
 .
e
19b, d A metallic surface ejects electrons when exposed to λred > λviolet
green light of intensity I but no photoelectrons are VIBGYOR pattern shows that VIBG all have λ less than
emitted when exposed to yellow light of intensity I. It is that of yellow colour and hence can initiate
possible to eject electrons from the same surface by photoelectric effect irrespective of intensity.
(a) Yellow light of some intensity which is more than
I.
(b) Green light of any intensity
(c) Red light of any intensity
(d) Violet light of any intensity
74
20c Stopping potential for photoelectrons Conceptual
(a) Does not depend on the frequency of the
incident light.
(b) Does not depend on the nature of cathode
material
(c) Depends on both the frequency of the incident
light and the nature of the cathode material
(d) Depends on the intensity of the incident light
21c A moving particle is associated with a wave packet or Conceptual
group of waves. The group velocity is equal to
(a) Velocity of light
(b) Velocity of sound
(c) Velocity of particle
1
(d)
particle velocity
22a A particle of mass 10-31 kg is moving with a speed of 105 h
ms-1. The de Broglie wavelength of the particle is =
mv
(a) 6.63 x 10-8 m
6.626 x10−34
0  =
(b) 6.63  (10−31 )(105 )
0
(c) 66.3   λ = 6.63 x 10-8 m
(d) 6.63 x 10-7 m
23b A neutron is confined to a nucleus of size 10-14 m. The Since ΔxΔp – h
minimum momentum of the electron may be  (2 x 10-14)Δp = 6.6 x 10-34
(a) 6.6 x 10-20 kgms-1  Δp = 3.3 x 10-20 kgms-1
-20 -1
(b) 3.3 x 10 kgms
(c) 3.3 x 10-48 kgms-1
(d) 6.6 x 10-48 kgms-1
24d The electron beam in a cathode ray tube passes E 6.6 x106
undeflected through crossed electric and magnetic fields, v = =
6 -1 B 1.2
E = 6.6 x 10 NC and B = 1.2 T. The speed of the electron
 v = 5.5 x 106 ms-1
in ms-1 is
(a) 1.1 x 106
(b) 1.1 x 105
(c) 5.5 x 105
(d) 5.5 x 106
25c When a metallic surface is illuminated by a hc
monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the stopping  = 0 + 3V0 …(1)
potential for photoelectric current is 3V0. When the same hc
surface is illuminated by light of wavelength 2λ, the = 0 + V0 …(2)
stopping potential is V0. The threshold wavelength for
2
Subtracting
this surface for photoelectric effect is
(a) 6λ hc
2V0 =
4 2
(b) hc
3  V0 =
(c) 4λ 4
(d) 8λ hc
 0 =
4
74
hc hc
 =
0 4
 0 = 4
26a, b It is necessary to consider light as a stream of photons to Photoelectric effect and Compton effect are explained
explain on particle nature of light i.e., light is considered to be
(a) Photoelectric effect made up of a stream of photons.
(b) Compton effect
(c) Polarization of light
(d) Diffraction of light
27d A small photocell is placed at a distance of 4 m from a 1
photosensitive surface. When light falls on the surface I
d2
the current is 5 mA. If the distance of cell is decreased to d
1 m, the current will become When d becomes , I becomes 16I
(a) 1.25 mA
4
 5
(b)   mA
 16 
(c) 20 mA
(d) 80 mA
28b An electron of mass m, when accelerated through a h
potential difference V has de-Broglie wavelength λ. The =
2meV
de-Broglie wavelength associated with a proton of mass
h
M accelerated through the same potential difference will '=
be 2 MeV
m m
(a)     '=
M  M
m
(b) 
M
M 
(c)   
m
M
(d) 
m
29d Cathode rays are made of pass between the poles of a By Flemings Left Hand Rule.
magnet as shown. The effect of the magnetic field is
(a) To increase the velocity of rays

(b) To deflect them towards the north pole
(c) To deflect them towards the south pole
(d) To deflect them out of the plane of the paper.
30c In Millikan’s oil drop experiment, an oil drop is held V 
stationary by a potential difference of 400 V. If another mg = qE = q  
d
drop of double the radius, but carrying the same charge,
is to be held stationary, the potential difference required
74
is 4 3 V 
(a) 800 V  r  g = q 
3  d
(b) 1600 V
For a drop of radius 2r
(c) 3200 V
4 3 V'
(d) 400 V
 3  (2 r )   g = q
d
 V’ = 8 V
 V’ = 3200 V
ATOMS, MOLECULES & NUCLEI

1c Nuclear fission was discovered by Conceptual
(a) Rutherford
(b) Chadwick
(c) Hahn and Strassman
(d) Bequerel
2d The ratio of the energies of the hydrogen atom in the First excited state is n = 2 and second excited state is n =
first to the second excited state 3. Also,
(a) 4 : 1 1
(b) 1 : 4 En  2
n
(c) 4 : 9 E2 9
(d) 9 : 4  =
E3 4
3a The Bohr radius of the fifth electron of phosphorus For the fifth electron to act as a dopant it must lie in the
atom (atomic number 15) acting as a dopant in silicon valence shell of P.
(relative dielectric constant 12) is So n = 3. (TRICKY HINT!)
(a) 380.9 pm Z = 15 {for Phosphorus}
(b) 390.8 pm n 2 h 2 0 n 2
(c) 930.8 pm Since rn = = r
 me2 Z Z 0
(d) 830.9 pm 0
Where r0 = 0.529  = 52.9 pm
9
 r3 = (52.9 pm)
15
When phosphorus acts as dopant in silicon, the
expression for Bohr radius is
n 2 h 2
rn' = = krn
 me2 Z
 rn' = 12rn {  = k 0 }
9 
 r3' = 12r3 = 12  (52.9) pm 
15 
 '
r3 = 380.88 pm
4b, c The momentum of a single photon of red light of For a photon
frequency 400 x 1012 Hz moving through free space is pc = hv
(a) Zero hv
(b) 8.8 x 10-28 kgms-2
 p=
c
(c) 1.65 x 10-6 MeVc-1  p = 8.8 x 10-28 kgms-2
74
(d) Data Insufficient  p = 1.65 x 10-6 MeVc-1
5c The speed of the electron in the first orbit (ground Speed of electron in the nth orbit of H like atom is
state) of the hydrogen atom in terms of velocity of light 1  cZ 
c is vn =  
137 n  
c
(a)
2
c
(b)
11
c
(c)
137
c
(d)
274
6a If 1 mg of U235 is completely annihilated, the energy E = mc2
liberated is  E = (10-6)(9 x 1016)
(a) 9 x 1010 J  E = 9 x 1010 J
(b) 9 x 1019 J
(c) 9 x 1018 J
(d) 9 x 1017 J
7d The radioactivity of a sample is R1 at time t1 and R2 at R1 = λN1 and R2 = λN2 (λ is same for given sample)
time t2. If the half life of the sample be T, the number of As N2 < N1
atoms that have disintegrated in time (t2 – t1) is Number of atoms disintegrated in time (t2 – t1) is
proportional to R1  R − R2 
R2
− = 1
    
(a) R1t1 – R2t2 N1 – N2 =
(b) (R1 – R2)-1
( R1 − R2 ) ( R1 − R2 ) T  R − R T
(c)
N1 – N2 = ( 1 2)
0.693
T
(d) (R1 – R2)T
8a, c H , He+ and O++ all having the same kinetic energy pass
+
mv 2mE
through a region in which there is a uniform magnetic r = =
field perpendicular to their velocity. The masses of H+,
qB qB
He+ and O++ are 1 u, 4 u and 16 u respectively. m
 r
(a) H+ will be deflected the most q
(b) O++ will be deflected the most
q
(c) He+ and O++ will be deflected equally  Deflection 
(d) All will be deflected equally. m
9d The rate of decay of a radioactive element Conceptual
(a) Increases with increase in time
(b) Decreases with increase in time
(c) Remains constant with increase in time
(d) Decreases exponentially with time
10b For large principal quantum number n the frequency of e 2 cZ
revolution of electron is equal to the frequency of v 2h 0 c n
transition of the electron between two adjacent orbits. f n = n =
2 rn n 2 h 2 0
This frequency f is proportional to 2
1  me Z 2
(a)
n2  me4 Z 2  1
 fn =  2 3  3
(b)
1  4 0 h  n
3
n
74
1
(c)
n
1
(d)
n0
11b The more readily fissionable isotope of uranium has an Conceptual
atomic mass of
(a) 234
(b) 235
(c) 236
(d) 238
12a Consider α particles, β-particles and γ-rays, each having Conceptual
an energy of 0.5 MeV. In increasing order of
penetrating powers, the radiations are
(a) α, β, γ
(b) α, γ, β
(c) Β, γ, α
(d) γ, β, α
13b In the given reaction, the radioactive radiations are Conceptual
emitted in the sequence as
Z X A →Z +1 Y A →Z −1 T A−4 →Z −1 T A−4
(a) α, β, γ
(b) β, α, γ
(c) γ, α, β
(d) α, γ, β
14a,b,d A radioactive sample has initial concentration N0 of N = N0e-λt
nuclei N = Number of undecayed nuclei in the sample at time t.
(a) The number of undecayed nuclei present in Total number of undecayed nuclei equals (N0 – N)
the sample decays exponentially with time  (N0 – N) = N0(1 – e-λt)
(b) The activity (R) of the sample at any instant is Which is growing exponentially with time.
directly proportional to the number of dN
undecayed nuclei present in the sample at that Activity R = -λN =
dt
time
(c) The number of decayed nuclei grows linearly
with time
(d) The number of decayed nuclei grows
exponentially with time
15a, d Which of the following statement(s) is (are) correct? Conceptual
(a) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is less than
the sum of the rest masses of its separated
nucleons
(b) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is greater
than the sum of the rest masses of its
separated nucleons
(c) In nuclear fission, is released by fusing two
nuclei of medium mass (approximately 100 u)
(d) In nuclear fission, energy is released by
fragmentation of a very heavy nucleus.
74
16c A hydrogen atom emits a photon corresponding to an h
electron transition from n = 5 to n = 1. The recoil speed Since p = 
of hydrogen atom is almost
1 1 
(a) 10-4 ms-1  mHv = hRH  − 
(b) 2 x 10-2 ms-1  1 25 
(c) 4 ms-1 hRH  24 
 v=  
(d) 8 x 102 ms-1 mH  25 
 v = 4 ms-1
17c The SI units of decay constant is Conceptual
(a) m-1
(b) mm-1
(c) s-1
(d) Year
18c Nuclear force is a Conceptual
(a) Repulsive and short range
(b) Repulsive and long range
(c) Attractive and short range
(d) Attractive and long range
19b 22
Ne nucleus, after absorbing energy, decays into two 22 Ne → 2 4 He + A X
10 2 Z
α- particles and an unknown nucleus. The unknown
 A = 14
nucleus is
 Z=6
(a) Nitrogen
14
(b) Carbon i.e., 6 C is the unknown nucleus.
(c) Oxygen
(d) Boron
20c A metal of atomic number Z is used as a target in a Conceptual
Coolidge tube. Let v be the frequency of the Kα line. For
a number of values of Z and v which plot gives a
straight line.
(a) v vs Z
1
(b) v vs
Z
(c) v vs Z
(d) v vs Z
21a,c,d In Bohr’s model of the hydrogen atom, let R, V, T and E In Bohr’s model of Hydrogen atom
represent the radius of the orbit, speed of the electron, R  n2
time period of revolution of electron and the total 1
energy of the electron respectively. The quantities V
n
proportional to the quantum number n are
(a) VR T  n3 and
1
(b) RE E
V n2
(c)
E
 VR  n
 TE  n
T
(d) T
R  n
R
V
 n
E
74
22b The ratio of the wavelength of first line of Lyman series 1 1 1
to the first line of Balmer series is = RH  − 
B 4 9
(a) 1 : 4
(b) 5 : 27 5
(c) 27 : 20 L 36 5
= =
(d) 20 : 27 B 3 27
4
23b The total energy of the electron in the hydrogen atom Since K.E. = - T.E.
in the ground state is – 13.6 eV. The kinetic energy of  K.E. = + 13.6 eV
the electron is
(a) 0
(b) 13.6 eV
(c) 6.8 eV
(d) - 13.6 eV
24d Radioactivity is Conceptual
(a) Spontaneous process
(b) Irreversible process
(c) Self disintegration process
(d) All the above
25a First atomic reactor was designed by Conceptual
(a) Fermi
(b) Teller
(c) Wilson
(d) Rutherford
4
26d The helium atom does not contain 2He has got four nucleons
(a) Two protons
(b) Two neutrons
(c) Two electrons
(d) Six nucleons
27a A nuclear reactor is based on Conceptual
(a) Nuclear fission
(b) Nuclear fusion
(c) Gravitational contraction
(d) Photoelectric effect
28a The half life of 215At is 100 µs. The time taken for the  Time lapsed 
4  
radioactivity of a sample of 215At to decay to
1
th of 1 1 1  T1/2 
16 =  = 
its initial value is 16  2   2 
(a) 400 µs
Time lapsed
(b) 6.3 µs  =4
(c) 40 µs T1/2
(d) 300 µs  Time lapsed = 400 µs
29b Rutherford is a unit of Conceptual

(a) Energy
(b) Radioactivity
(c) Photoelectric current
(d) Magnetic field
74
30c The activity of a sample of radioactivity material is R1 at If R0 be the initial activity of the sample, then R1 = R0
time t1 and R2 at time t2(t2 > t1). If mean life of the t1  t2
radioactive sample is T, then e e
and R2 = R0
(a) R1t1 = R2t2 1  1
R1 − R2 Where  =  Mean life = T = 
(b) = constant T  
t2 − t1
R2 et2
= t1 = e ( 1 2 )
 t −t
 t1 − t2  
(c) R2 = R1 exp   R1 e
 T 
 t   t1 − t2 
(d) R2 = R1 exp  1 
 R2 = R1 exp  
 T 
 Tt2 
SOLIDS & SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

1a The packing fraction for a simple cubic crystal is Conceptual

(a)
6

(b)
3 2
3
(c)
8
2
(d)
6
2c Which of the following has greatest packing fraction? Conceptual
(a) Simple cubic
(b) Body centred cubic
(c) Face centred cubic
(d) All have equal packing fraction
3a A solid that is not transparent to visible light and whose Conceptual
electrical conductivity decreases with temperature is
formed by
(a) Metallic binding
(b) Covalent binding
(c) Ionic binding
(d) Vander Waal’s binding
4b In an npn transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 Collector current,
mA. If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the collector IC = 10 mA
(a) The emitter current will be 9 mA 90
(b) The emitter current will be 11 mA = = 0.9
100
(c) The base current will be 10 mA I
(d) The base current will be 0.1 mA = C
IE
IC
 Emitter current, IE =

74
10
IE = = 11 mA
0.9
Base current, IB = IE – IC
IB = 11 – 10 = 1 mA
5d A gas of free electrons is present in Conceptual
(a) Ionic crystals
(b) Covalent crystals
(c) Molecular crystals
(d) Metallic crystals
6c To get an output Y = 1 from circuit of figure, the inputs Conceptual
must be
7b The frequency response curve of RC coupled amplifier Conceptual

is shown in figure. The band width of the amplifier will
be
(a) f3 – f2
(b) f4 – f1
f4 − f2
(c)
2
(d) f3 – f1
8c A semiconductor device is connected in series circuit Conceptual
with a battery and a resistance. A current is found to
pass through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is
reversed, the current drops almost to zero. The device
may be
(a) A p-type semiconductor
(b) A n-type semiconductor
(c) A pn junction
(d) An intrinsic semiconductor
9b An oscillator is basically an amplifier with again In oscillator, feedback is positive gain with positive
(a) Less than unity feedback
(b) More than unity A
(c) Zero Af = 1
1−  A
(d) 0.5
10c The diode used in figure requires minimum current of 1 VF − VB
mA to be above the knee voltage 0.7 V of current i = R
74
versus voltage characteristics. The maximum value of R VF − VB
so that the voltage is above knee point is
 R=
i
5 − 0.7
i= = 4.3 x 103 Ω = 4.3 kΩ
10−3
(a) 5 kΩ
(b) 5.7 kΩ
(c) 4.3 kΩ
(d) 3.5 kΩ
11d A piece of copper and another of germanium are Conceptual
cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance
of
(a) Each of them increases
(b) Each of them decreases
(c) Copper increases and germanium decreases
(d) Copper decreases and germanium increases
12c In a full wave rectifier with input frequency 50 Hz, the Conceptual
ripple in the output is mainly of the frequency (in Hz)
(a) 25
(b) 50
(c) 100
(d) 502
13c The diagram of a logic circuit is given below. The output Output of upper OR gate = W + X
F of the circuit is represented by Output of lower OR gate = W + Y
Net output F = (W + X)(W + Y)
= WW + WY + XW + XY
= W + WY + XW + XY (since W.W = W)
= W(1 + Y) + XW + XY (since 1 + Y = 1)
(a) W.(X + Y)
= W.1 + XW + XY
(b) W.(X . Y)
= W(1 + X) + XY = W + XY
(c) W + (X . Y)
(d) W + (X + Y)
14d For a transistor the value of α = 0.9, the value of β is  0.9
= = =9
(a) 1 1 −  1 − 0.9
(b) 0.09
(c) 0.9
(d) 9
15a 1 1 is equal to 1 1 1 1
− − = −
    ( IC / I E ) ( IC / I B )
(a) 1
1 1 I E − I B I C
(b) 2 − = = =1
(c) αβ   I C I C
(d) α – β
16c In good conductors of electricity, the type of bonding Conceptual
that exits is
(a) Ionic
(b) Covalent
(c) Metallic
(d) Vander Waal’s
74
17b The conductivity of semiconductors like Ge and Si Conceptual
(a) Increases when it is doped with tetravalent
impurity
(b) Increases when it is doped with pentavalent
trivalent impurity
(c) Increases when it is doped with pentavalent
impurity and decreases when it is doped with
trivalent impurity
(d) Decreases when it is doped with pentavalent
impurity and increases when it is doped with
trivalent impurity
18b If A is the atomic mass number of an element, N is the Conceptual
Avogadro number and a is the lattice parameter, then
the density of the element, if it has bcc crystal
structure, is
A
(a)
Na 3
2A
(b)
Na 3
3A
(c)
Na 3
2 2A
(d)
Na 3
19a A solid possesses a definite shape Conceptual
(a) Negligibly small thermal motion
(b) Long range order
(c) Higher kinetic energy of molecules
20a In a semiconductor diode P side is earthed and N, side Conceptual
is applied a potential of -2 V. The diode shall
(a) Conduct
(b) Not conduct
(c) Conduct partially
(d) Breakdown
21b A crystal lattice is Conceptual
(a) A random arrangement of atoms in a crystal
(b) An ordered arrangement of points in space at
which the atoms, ions or molecules are
positioned.
(c) A random arrangement of molecules but
orderly arrangement of atoms
(d) A piece of crystal
22d Given sets of elements are phosphorus, arsenic, indium Conceptual
and bismuth. The addition of which in pure
semiconductors will result in p-type semiconductor
(a) Phosphorus, arsenic and indium
(b) Phosphorus, arsenic, indium and bismuth
(c) Indium and arsenic
74
(d) Indium only
23d Vander Waal’s crystals are Conceptual
(a) Very hard
(b) Of high melting point
(c) Non-volatile
24d The output from a logic gate is 1 when inputs A, B and C Conceptual
are such that
(a) A = 1, B = 0, C = 1
(b) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
(c) A = B = C = 0
(d) A = B = C = 1
25a The symbol represents Conceptual
(a) NOT gate

(b) OR gate
(c) AND gate
(d) NOR gate
26c Which of the following is not a characteristic of an ionic Conceptual
compound?
(a) Crystalline in solid form
(b) Bad conductor of electricity when dry
(c) Low melting point
(d) High melting point
27b NAND and NOR gates are called universal gates Conceptual
primarily because they
(a) Are available universally
(b) Can be combined to produce OR, AND and NOT
gates
(c) Are widely used in integrated circuit packages
(d) Are easiest to manufacture
28b The value of β Conceptual
(a) Is always less than 1
(b) Lies between 20 and 200
(c) Is always greater than 200
(d) Is always infinity
29c The forbidden energy gap in conductors, semi- Conceptual
conductors and insulators are EG1, EG2 and EG3
respectively. The relation among them is
(a) EG1 = EG2 = EG3
(b) EG1 > EG2 > EG3
(c) EG1 < EG2 < EG3
(d) EG1 < EG2 > EG3
74
30b The current gain α of a transistor is 0.95. The change in IC I E − I B
emitter current is 10 mA. The change in base current is = =
IE IE
(a) 9.5 mA
10 − I B
(b) 0.5 mA  0.95 =
(c) 10.5 mA 10
(d)  200  mA  IB = 0.5 mA
 19 
74

Jee Main Physics Super Thirty

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Jee Main Physics Super Thirty

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHAPTERWISE SUPER THIRTY

ASHOKA PHYSICS CLASSES

Power radiated by the sun is

HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS

15b The first law of thermodynamics is concerned with the Conceptual

23d A wire of length L0 is supplied heat to raise its 

For 5 maximum responses

the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the earth T 2 = 4 2

 W = mka2 {where m is mass of particle}

ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS & CIRCULAR MOTION

a) 12 kgm2s-1 out of the plane of the figure

a) Angular velocity and total energy (kinetic and

a) Equal in the processes A and B

WORK, ENERGY, POWER & COLLISIONS

together during collision. If E be the initial kinetic energy,

DESCRIPTION OF MOTION IN TWO & THREE DIMENSIONS

2a A particle is projected with a velocity v, so that its range R = 2H

5c A football is kicked in parabolic path. Which of the Conceptual

So, we conclude that angle between velocity and

19a Six persons are initially at the six corners of a hexagon of

a t =−2 s = -24 + 42 = 18 ms-2

In order that the particle remains in equilibrium, the

( A + B) = A2B2 sin2 θ + A2B2 cos2θ

UNITS, SIGNIFICANT FIGURES, MEASUREMENT & ERRORS

(a) With S1 closed, V1 = 15 V, V2 = 25 V

(a) The readings of both the ammeter and the

In steady state the branch containing the capacitor can

(a) Potential difference across the terminals of the

THERMAL, CHEMICAL AND THERMOELECTRIC EFFECTS OF CURRENT

time t, the heat produced in the resistor is H. When the   R1 =   R2

(a) 4.5 V 1.5 V

12d A current I flows in a circular arc of wire which subtends Conceptual

29c A moving charge produces Conceptual

4d Hardness of a magnetic material is measured by the value Conceptual

10a Agonic lines on magnetic map represent lines of Conceptual

18d A permanent magnet Conceptual

25c The magnetic permeability is maximum for Conceptual

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION & ALTERNATING CURRENTS

the plane of the wheel, an emf of 0.01 V is induced 1

5a The mutual inductance of a pair of coils, each of N turns, dI

10b Which one of the following curves represents variation of Conceptual

20b Capacitor C1 of capacitance 1 µF and capacitor C2 of 1

common battery. The two capacitors are then separated 1

21c An LCR series circuit contains L = 8 H, C = 0.5 µF and R = 1

(a) Zero in both 1 and 2

25b A conducting rod of length l is falling with a velocity v Conceptual

(a) Magnetic field is increased uniformly

RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

7a A bulb is placed between two plane mirrors inclined at an 360

 θ = 90 – 490 = 410 with the horizon.

(a) 1 eV 6000  (red) for convenience of a rough calculation.

27c Interference fringes were produced in Young’s double-slit D

29b The wave associated with 2.7 K belongs to

30c A parallel plate capacitor consists of two circular plates

ELECTRONS & PHOTONS

12c, d The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission 0

(a) Charge of the electron

(a) To increase the velocity of rays

ATOMS, MOLECULES & NUCLEI

29b Rutherford is a unit of Conceptual

SOLIDS & SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

7b The frequency response curve of RC coupled amplifier Conceptual

(a) NOT gate

You might also like